Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
of
Drug Substances
Volume 12
Edited by
Klaus Florey
The Squibb Institute for Medical Research
New Brunswick, New Jersey
Contributing Editors
Abdullah A. Al-Badr Glenn A. Brewer, Jr.
Norman W. Atwater Hans-Georg Leemann
Steven A. Benezra Joseph A. Mollica
Compiled under the auspices of the
Pharmaceutical Analysis and Control Section
APhA Academy of Pharmaceutical Sciences
ACADEMIC PRESS,INC.
111 Fifth Avenue, New York. New York 10003
LIBRARY
OF CONGRESS CATALOG CARD NUMBER:70-187259
ISBN 0-12-260812-7
83 84 85 86 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
AFFILIATIONS OF EDITORS,
CONTRIBUTORS, AND REVIEWERS
vii
viii AFFILIATIONS OF EDITORS, CONTRIBUTORS, AND REVIEWERS
*Deceased
PREFACE
ix
AMANTADINE
Joel Kirschbaum
1. Introduction 2
1.1 History, Therapeutic Use, and Mechanism of Action 2
1.2 Nomenclature, Molecular Weight, and Structure 2
1.3 Appearance, Color, Odor, and Precautions 2
1.4 Synthesis 4
1.5 Reactions, Stability, and Metabolism 5
2. Physical Properties of Crystalline Amantadine 6
2.1 Single Crystal X-Ray Diffraction 6
2.2 X-Ray Powder Diffraction 7
2.3 Mass Spectrometry 9
2.4 Infrared Spectrometry 9
2.5 Electron Tunnelling and Photoelectron Spectrometry 11
2.6 Thermal Analysis 13
2.7 Microscopy 13
2.8 Surface Area 13
2.9 Hydration 13
2.10 Polymorphism 13
3. Spectrometryof Amantadine in Solution 14
3.1 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectrometry (NMR) 14
3.2 Ultraviolet Spectrometry 16
1. Bulk Solution Properties 16
4.1 Solubilitiesin Aqueous and Nonaqueous Solvents 16
4.2 Ionization 18
4.3 Dipole Moments 19
4.4 Hydrodynamic Properties 19
5. Methods of Analysis 20
5.1 Compositional Analysis 20
5.2 Identity and Colorimetric Methods 20
5.3 Titration 21
5.4 Spectrometry 21
5.5 Gas-Liquid Chromatography 22
5.6 Thin-Layer Chromatography 22
5.7 High-Performance Liquid Chromatography 22
5.8 Electrochemistry 22
5.9 Fluorescence Spectrometry 29
5.10 Tissue Culture 30
5.11 Comparison of Methods 30
References 31
1. Introduction
ia
HCH
5
4
NH2
7 HCI 3
5 10
1.4 Synthesis
I II
&- &+-&+
F(
+
"RH & m
E l e c t r o n d i f f r a c t i o n d a t a (65) f o r adamantane a g r e e d
w i t h t h e x-ray c r y s t a l l o g r a p h y . The band l e n g t h of
C-H and C-C (1.54 t 0.01A) a p p e a r normal, and t h e
C-C-C a n g l e s a r e t e t r a h e d r a l (109.5 +- 1.5O).
To observe x-ray d i f f r a c t i o n p a t t e r n s , a P h i l i p s
powder d i f f r a c t i o n u n i t e m i t t i n g CuKa r a d i a t i o n a t
1.54A was used w i t h a s c i n t i l l a t i o n c o u n t e r d e t e c t o r
(66). The r e l a t i v e l a c k of peaks s e e n i n F i g u r e 1
w a s e x p e c t e d from t h e h i g h l y symmetrical s t r u c t u r e of
amantadine h y d r o c h l o r i d e . Below a r e t h e s o r t e d d a t a
based on h i g h e s t i n t e n s i t y of 1.00 u s i n g CuKa
radiation.
90-
80-
>
t-
v)
70-
Z
60-
Z
H
50--
W
>
+ 48.-
a
30-
DL
20-
10-
0- T F V
3
D
d r l d r - i d
3000
+
NH3 stretching (broad)
2923 CH stretching (antisymmet ric)
2855 CH2 stretching (symmetric)
2700-2250 2+ stretching
NH3+
2000 NH3+ overtones
1600 NH3+ deformation
1500 NH3 deformation
1452 CH deformation
2
1365 NH deformation
1307 CH3 wag
1300 and below 2
Fingerprint region
a
zp absorbances at 3000-2800, 1460, 1377 and 123
cm were du to mineral oil. The absorbance at
3500-3400 cm-F was due to water from the KBr in the
pellet.
A diagnostic test for the presence of the
adamantane skeleton is the l.ow-intensity absorption
in the region 1017-1038 cm-l.
The far-in rared spectrum was determined from
- to 100 cm
6501 -5 .
The torsional vibration at 230
cm , which was identical in both the solid and in
cyclohexane solution, was assigned (73) to the amino
group. A barrier height of 2.00 kcal/molel was
calculated. The +band at approximately 490 cm- was
assigned to a NH torsional vibration.
3
2.5 Electron Tunnelling and Photoelectron
Spectrometry .
Inelastic electron tunnelling spectroscopy is a
non-optical vibrational spectroscopy used to study
the adsorption of adsorbates on barrier oxide films
grown on metals. The interpretation of the spectrum
(74) assigns peaks to C-C, -CH2, -CH and C-C-C to be
caused by scissoring, bending, twisting, wagging and
rocking. Vibrations associated with the amine
substituent are almost completely absent, probably
due t o interaction with the adsorbing oxide surface.
Photoelectron spectroscopy is used to determine
ionization potentials, which can test the theoretical
procedures used to predict orbital energies. The
12 JOEL KIRSCHBAUM
F i g u r e 3 . I n f r a r e d s p e c t r a of Amantadine h y d r o c h l o r i d e .
Upper p o r t i o n ; m i n e r a l o i l m u l l : Lower p o r t i o n , potassium
bromide p e l l e t , See t e x t f o r d e t a i l s .
li-
I
AMANTADINE 13
2.7 Microscopy
2.9 Hydration
2.10 Polymorphism
Chemica1 Relative
Shift (ppm) Area Assignment
1.35 2H -NH
1.55 6H 8-Ci
1.62 6H 6-CH
2.05 3H y-CH
3.12 13C-NMR
29.7 6-C
36.2 B -C
46.2 Y-C
47.2 a-C
In addition, the calculated shift values agree
Figure 4 : Proton Magnetic Resonance Spectrum of Amantadine Hydrochloride
3.13 15N-NMR
Acetonitrile 4
Chloroform 75
Ethano1 200
Hexanes <1
Isopropanol 35
Methanol 250
Methylene chloride 10
Water-Methanol (1 :1) >250
Water >250
Hydrochloric acid solution 0.1M 350
Aqueous buffer, pH 2 75
Aqueous buffer, pH 4 50
Aqueous buffer, pH 7 -2
Aqueous buffer, pH 10 <1
Sodium hydroxide solution 0.1M <1
4.2 Ionization
t o z e r o i o n i c s t r e n g t h gave pK v a l u e s of 10.71 f
0.01 a t 20', 10.58 f 0.07 a t 250aand 10.14 f 0.02 a t
37". A l i n e a r p l o t gave -d(pK ) / d T = 0.034. These
pKa r e s u l t s are similar t o s u c ! a l k y l a n a l o g u e s a s
2-amino-2-methylpropane (pKa = 10.68 a t 25') and
3-amino-3-ethylpentane (pKa = 10.59) , and s u p p o r t t h e
c o n c l u s i o n (96) t h a t t h e r e i s l i t t l e s t r a i n i n t h i s
a l i c y c l i c molecule.
4.4 Hydrodynamic P r o p e r t i e s
1 3 ~ - ~(set)
1
Solvent Viscosity -
B 1 6
CD OD
cI 0.76 3.9 6.5 279
CDdlg 0.67 5.1 9.4 3.7
CC14 0.89 9.1 16.4 8.2
T v a l u e s a p p e a r t o be determined by t h e tumbling of
1
a monomer; any s o l u t e - s o l u t e o r s o l v e n t - s o l u t e p a i r s
t h a t are formed a r e t o o s h o r t - l i v e d t o b e measured by
t h i s technique.
I n deuteromethanol t h e moment o f i n e r t i a i s I
II'
300, I , 419 and p , which i s 1 1 / 1 , 1.4.
T t e d i f f u s i o n c o n s t a n t s a r e ' Liven below, where
R1 d e s c r i b e d t h e r o t a t i o n about t h e p r e f e r r e d C
a x i g , anClR2 i s t h e d i f f u s i o n c o n s t a n t , i n u n i t s 02
10 sec . The d a t a i n d i c a t e l i t t l e motion about
t h e C-NH2 bond.
Solvent
R1
-- y
CD OD 5.1 1.7
CD?13 7.2 2.2
20 JOEL KIRSCHBAUM
5. Methods of Analysis
5.3 Titration
5.4 Spectrometry
5.8 Electrochemistry
1 2
- 1
0 4 8 0 4 8 12
Figure 6 .
0 4
1 2
8
Rerention
Gas-Liquid Chromatograms:
J
0
time
4
(min)
I
8
Upper P o r t i o n , A ,
c o n t r o l plasma; B , plasma e x t r a c t c o n t a i n i n g 457 ng
amantadine h y d r o c h l o r i d e (1) p e r mL: Lower P o r t i o n , C ,
C o n t r o l u r i n e ; D , Urine e x t r a c t c o n t a i n i n g 62.4 ug/mL drug
(1). Chlorphentermine i s t h e i n t e r n a l s t a n d a r d ( 2 ) .
Table I. Gas Liquid Chromatography of Amantadine
Bulk Amantadine
Column Carrier T(Co1umn) Detector Reference
3% OV-1 on Chromosorb W-HP (100-120 mesh) N2,H2,Air 150-250" N-P Detector 118
3% OV-17 on Chromosorb W-HP (100-120 mesh) N 2 ,H2 ,Air 150-250" N-P Detector 118
co l
m Carrier T(Co1umn) Detector Reference
5% Apiezon L o r Gas Chrom 0 (100-120 mesh) H2, Air 160" Flame Ionization 61
2% OV-101 on Chromosorb W (100-120 mesh) Air, H
2 130" Flame Ionization 61
N2
After conversion to isothiocyanate, 3% OV- He 170"or190" Mass Spectrometer 108
225 on Gas Chrom Q
Amantdine i n Urine
10% Apiezon L and 2% KOH on 80/100 145" Flame Ionization 122
N2
Chromosorb W AW
6. Acknowledgements
7. References
L (-1
H-C0-C H-C
1
OH
OH
HO
Amikacin h a s b e e n r e p o r t e d t o e x i s t a s a
f r e e b a s e (CAS Reg. N o . 37517-28-51, a 1 : 2
s u l f a t e (CAS Reg. N o . 39831-55-5), a 1:1
s u l f a t e (CAS Reg. N o . 56086-43-2) and a 1:1
c a r b o n a t e (CAS Reg. N o . 75282-58-5).
1.4 Appearance :
Amikacin i s a w h i t e , c r y s t a l l i n e p o w d e r 3 .
The u s u a l m a r k e t e d form i s a s t e r i l e , color-
less t o s t r a w yellow s o l u t i o n f o r i n j e c t i o n
p r e p a r e d by d i s s o l v i n g a m i k a c i n w i t h d i l u t e
s u l f u r i c a c i d a t a 1 : 2 r a t i o o f a m i k a c i n base
t o H2S04. The s o l u t i o n may c o n t a i n p r e s e r -
v a t i v e s , such a s b i s u l f i t e s and b u f f e r s , s u c h
a s c i t r a t e . The amount o f a m i k a c i n i s e i t h e r
50 o r 250 mg p e r m 1 4 r l o ,
1.5 USP S t a n d a r d :
The c u r r e n t USP s t a n d a r d f o r a m i k a c i n ,
L o t G-1, i s t h e f r e e base a n d h a s a n a s s i g n e d
p o t e n c y of 9 1 4 mcg/mg on a n " a s i s " b a s i s .
A n a l y s i s o f t h a t material g a v e a m o i s t u r e
c o n t e n t of 7 . 3 % 1 2 .
2.0 -
Physical Properties:
2.1 M e l t i n a Ranae:
H . Kawaguchi r e p o r t e d a m e l t i n g r a n g e
203-2040C3. commercial m a t e r i a l r a n g e s f r o m
201-204°C'
2.2 -
Specific Rotation:
The s p e c i f i c r o t a t i o n of a m i k a c i n h a s
been r e p o r t e d a s = +99O, (C= 1 . 0 , H 2 0 ) '.
The CFR r e q u i r e m e n t f o r t h e d r i e d s u b s t a n c e i s
+ 9 7 O t o +1O5Ol4
2.3 Solubilitv:
The e q u i l i b r i u m s o l u b i l i t y i n w a t e r a t
25OC h a s been r e p o r t e d a s 1 8 5 m g / m l 1 3 . Dosage
AMIKACIN SULFATE 41
13
12
11
10
8
P"
CDN
..
rlf
rl CD Lnm
a,
I+ ri N
A
rd
E-1
45
46 PETER M. MONTELEONE E T A .
CHEMICAL SHIFT
CARBON (pm) *
c-1 50.4
c-2 35.0
c-3 49.4
c-4 87.5
c-5 75.4
C-6 81.1
c-1’ 99.1
c-2’ 72.6
c-3’ 73.8
c-4’ 71.8
c-5’ 73.7
C-6’ 42.3
c-1- 100.2
c-2- 72.4
c-3- 54.9
c -4& 70.0
c-5- 72.8
C-6- 61.1
c= 0 177.2
Ca 70.7
C B 36.9
C Y 38.1
*Chemical shifts of free base i n ppm downfield from TMS (in D20)
AMIKACIN SULFATE 49
Ions
- Structure Formation
586 [M+H1 + Protonated molecular ion.
512 [M+H minus ( C H O H - C H ~ - C H ~ - NH~)]+ Loss of all but the carbonyl of the
L-HABA side chain.
382 [M+H minus (Ring A minus H) minus (CH2=CHNH2)]* Loss of Ring A with H rearrangement
and part of the L-HABA side chain.
324 [M+H minus (Ring A minus H) minus L-HABA + HI+ Simple cleavaqes with H rearrangement
leaving 2 rings.
217 [M+H minus (Ring A+H) minus (Ring C+H) minus Cleavage of both sugars and part of
(CHz=CH-NHz) 1’ the side chain.
215 [M+H minus (Ring A+H) minus (Ring C+H) minus A s above, yet H rearrangment is
(CH3-CHz-NHz) I+ reversed at one point.
52 PETER M. MONTELEONE E T A .
OH
$4
I
HO
bH
0
m l z 382 m l z 440
8 RING B
AMIKACIN
4.287 34 3.184 11
3.0 Synthesis:
Amikacin (BB-K8) is a semisynthetic derivative
of kanamycin acylated with L(-)-y-amino-a-hydroxy-
butyric acid (L-HABA) at the C-1 amino group of the
2-deoxystreptamine moiety.
Amikacin (BB-K8) has been prepared by Hiroshi
Kawaguchi et a1.3 starting from kanamycin, I. The
carbobenzoxylation of kanamycin at the 6’-amino
group was achieved by the activated ester method
using N- (benzylcarbonyloxy)succinimide (CBZ-NOS),
11. The reaction product was purified by ion-
exchange chromatography on Amberlite CG-50 to give
6’-N-benzyloxycarbonyl kanamycin, 111, as shown in
Figure 11. The acylating agent was prepared by
protecting the y-amino group of L-HABA, IV, with
carbobenzoxy chloride, followed by reaction with
N-hydroxysuccinimide to yield active ester of
N-CBZ-protected-L-HABA, VI.
The acylating of 6’-N-Benzyloxycarbonyl kana-
mycin, 111, at C-1 amino group of the 2-deoxy-
streptamine moiety was carried out by an equimolar
reaction with Compound VI at room temperature. The
reaction mixture was subjected to hydrogenolysis
to remove protecting groups at both the 6’-amino
group of the 6’-amino-6’-deoxy-~-glucose moiety of
kanamycin and the y-amino group in the acyl side
chain. The crude amikacin (BB-K8) obtained was
purified by column chromatography on Amberlite
CG-50 with aqueous ammonia. The active fractions
were combined, evaporated in vacuo and the residue
was crystallized from methanol-isopropanol to yield
needle crystals of amikacin base, VII. Synthesis
of amikacin is also claimed in three U . S .
patents2 5, 6. The first of these is the one
claiming the product, while the latter two claim
alternative processes for its preparation.
4.0 Drug Metabolism and Pharmacokinetics:
Amikacin is usually given by intramuscular
injection or intravenous infusion. Protein
binding is minimal. Almost all of the dose is
excreted unmetabolized in the urine6f2’.
AMIKACIN SULFATE 57
L I-)
wM+ticy- $H-COOH
on
CbX-CJ
u-3
HHCO-CH-CH2-CHz
bn hz
VII Amikacin ( B B - K 8 )
pharmacokinetics.
D. Zaske and K. CrossleyZ7, as well as K. A.
Kerridge6 have published articles which include
reviews for the pharmacokinetics of amikacin.
5.0 Stability - Degradation:
The stability of amikacin and amikacin sulfate
is reported in a series of papers by Kaplan
et al. 2, 3, These authors provide data on
the stability of amikacin base powder and solution,
aqueous amikacin sulfate solutions, and solutions
of amikacin sulfate admixed with various intra-
venous solutions with and without other therapeutic
agents present. Data given in these papers demon-
strate the chemical and thermal stability of
amikacin. Different lots of the free base powder
subjected to 56OC for four months showed an average
potency loss of 7.2 percent. At 25OC for 24 months
an average loss of 3.9 percent was observed. A
solution of the free base in distilled water at
approximately 185 mg per ml was autoclaved in a
closed vial for 30 minutes at 1 5 lb. pressure and
AMIKACIN SULFATE 59
1 2 1 O C ; no l o s s i n p o t e n c y was o b s e r v e d , a c o l o r
c h a n g e t o l i g h t y e l l o w was o b s e r v e d .
The s t a b i l i t y o f a q u e o u s s o l u t i o n s o f a m i k a c i n
s u l f a t e w a s summarized a s f o l l o w s : The a m i k a c i n
a c t i v i t y w a s maintained a t g r e a t e r than 90 percent
o f t h e o r i g i n a l l y p r e s e n t amount a f t e r e l e v a t e d
t e m p e r a t u r e s t o r a g e a t 56OC a n d 45OC f o r 4 m o n t h s ,
37OC f o r 1 2 months, a n d 25OC f o r up t o 36 months.
The p H o f t h e s o l u t i o n s w e r e 4 . 5 t o 6.8 f o r v a r i o u s
c o n c e n t r a t i o n s o f amikacin s u l f a t e w i t h and w i t h o u t
t h e presence of paraben p r e s e r v a t i v e s .
R e q u i r e m e n t s and methods a r e d e s c r i b e d i n t h e
1982 CFR, T i t l e 2 1 , p a r t s 444.6 and 444.206.
6.1 Identification:
I d e n t i f i c a t i o n i s p e r f o r m e d by c o n t i n u o u s
f l o w TLC ( 2 1 CFR 4 3 6 . 3 1 8 ) .
M o i s t u r e i s d e t e r m i n e d by K a r l F i s c h e r
t i t r a t i o n ( 2 1 CFR 4 3 6 . 2 0 1 ) . I t must n o t b e
more t h a n 8 . 5 % .
6.3 -
Specific Rotation:
The CFR r e q u i r e m e n t f o r s p e c i f i c r o t a t i o n
f o r a m i k a c i n b u l k i s n o t less t h a n + 9 7 O a n d
n o t more t h a n +105O ( a n h y d r o u s ) . The d e t e r -
m i n a t i o n i s made by t h e p r o c e d u r e d e s c r i b e d i n
436.20 u s i n g a n a q u e o u s s o l u t i o n c o n t a i n i n g
a m i k a c i n a t 2 0 mg/ml and a 1 d e c i m e t e r p o l a r i -
meter t u b e .
6.4 Microbiolosical Assav:
P o t e n c y i s d e t e r m i n e d by t h e m i c r o b i o -
l o g i c a l a s s a y f o r b o t h t h e b u l k and i n j e c t i o n .
I t is a t u r b i d i m e t r i c assay using Staphylo-
c o c c u s a u r e u s ATCC 6538P ( 2 1 CFR 4 3 6 . 1 0 6 ) .
Ti minimum p o t e n c y o f 9 0 0 mcg/mg, ( a n h y d r o u s )
i s r e q u i r e d f o r t h e b u l k and 9 0 % t o 1 2 0 % o f
t h e claimed value f o r t h e i n j e c t i o n .
60 PETER M. MONTELEONE ETAL.
Rf Value
Plate Developer Detection F o r Amikacin Reference
Silica Gel A - 0.16 (a) 2
Silica Gel F2511 A - 0.16 ( b ) 37
Silica Gel F 2 5 4 B Ninhydrin 0.23 (c) 38
Silica Gel C Ninhydrin - (d) 39
Silica Gel D Bioautography .06 (el 40
Developers
NOTES
gentamicin. ’‘
three antiserum systems making possible the
specific assa of amikacin, tobramycin and
I-labeled aminoglycosides were
used. Serum samples ranging from 2 to 50 mcg
of amikacin per ml were used to demonstrate
accuracy.
8.4 - -:
Radioenzymatic Assay (REA)
J. 14. Broughhall and D. S. Reevess1 de-
scribed the 14C-acetyltransferase technique
for assay of aminoglycosides. The enzyme
transfers a 14C-labeled acetyl group from the
coenzyme substrate to the aminoglycoside.
Separation of the 14C-labeled aminoglycoside
is carried out by absor tion onto 9hospho-
cellulose paper. The “C-acetyl coenzyme
is removed by washing, and the 14C-labeled
aminoglycoside remaining on the paper is
counted. Assays can be completed within an
hour.
P. Botha -
et
- a1.52 reported that 2 years
experience in assaying serum for aminoglyco-
sides, including amikacin, had shown the
acetyltransferase method to be rapid and
accurate. The method uses 6’-N-transacetylase
prepared from E. coli CH15 and 14C-acetyl
coenzyme A to Tabel the amikacin prior to
isolating and counting. Standard curves,
shown for 3-13 mcg of aminoglycoside per ml,
were linear.
AMIKACIN SULFATE 65
10.0 References :
(1981).
The United States Pharmacopeia XX, 28
(1980).
21 CFR 444.6 and 21 CFR 444.206 (1982).
W. C. Cantrell, Bristol Labs, Syracuse,
N.Y., data on file.
M. A. Kaplan, W. P. Coppola, B. C.
Nunning and A. P. Granatek, Curr.
Ther. Res. Clin. Exp., 2, 3 . 5 4 9 7 6 ) .
68 PETER M . MONTELEONE ET AL.
2 1 C F R 444.6 (1982).
1
P. J. Cloes, M. Dubost and H.
Vanderhaeghe, Analytical Profiles of
-Drug Substances, 5, 2 7 0 ( 1 9 7 7 ) .
D. A. Hull, Bristol Labs, Syracuse,
N.Y., data on file.
B. E. Rosenkrantz, J. R . Greco, J. G.
Hoogerheide and E. M. Oden, Analytical
Profiles of Drug Substances, -9, 3 1 0
Tr980) .
D. F. Whitehead, Bristol-Myers Pharma-
ceutical R. and D. Div., Syracuse,
N.Y., data on file.
M. S. Balakrishnan, Bristol-Myers
Pharmaceutical R. and D. Div.,
Syracuse, N.Y., data on file.
S. Toda, S. Nakagawa, T. Naito and
H. Kawaguchi, Tetrahedron Lett.,
No.
-- 41, 3 9 1 3 - 1 G ( 1 9 7 8 ) .
T. R. Marr, Bristol-Myers Pharmaceuti-
cal R. and D. Div., Syracuse, N.Y.,
data on file.
B. Green and V. Parr, V. G. Analytical
Instruments, Altrincham, England.
G. R. Dubay, Bristol-Myers Pharmaceuti-
cal R. and D. Div., Syracuse, N.Y.,
data on file.
H. Kawaguchi, T. Naito, and S.
Nakapany, U.S. Patent 3,781,268.
R. H. Schreiber and J . G. Keil, U.S.
Patent No. 3,974,137.
M. J. CrOn, J. G. Keil, J. S. Lin,
M. Ruggeri and D. Walker, U . S . Patent
No. 4,347,354.
AMIKACIN SULFATE 69
J. of Liquid Chromatography, -
- 2,
823-36 (1979).
(59)
Chem. (Winston-Salem, N. C. 1
1940-7 (1978).
zF
J . P. Anhalt and S. D. Brown, Clin.
1. History 14
2. Description 74
2.1 Name, Formula, Molecular Weight 74
2.2 Appearance, Colour, Odour 14
3. Synthesis 14
4. Physical Properties 15
4.1 Melting Range 15
4.2 Solubility 15
4.3 Dissociation Constant 15
4 . 4 Loss on Drying 76
4.5 Ultraviolet Spectrum 16
4.6 Infrared Spectrum 16
4.1 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectrum 79
4.8 Mass Spectrum 19
4.9 Differential Thermal Analysis (DTA) 79
5 . Identification and Colour Reactions 82
6. Degradation and Stability 83
7. Dissolution, Liberation and Diffusion 87
8. Methods of Analysis 92
9 . Drug Metabolism and Pharmacokinetics 97
References 100
1. H i s t o r y . E t h y l p - a m i n o b e n z o a t e was f i r s t s y t h e -
s i s e d by a german chemist R i t s e r t i n 1 8 9 0 and d u e
t o i t s low t o x i c i t y and good l o c a l a n e s t h e t i c pro-
p e r t i e s was g i v e n t h e t r a d e name o f A n e s t h e s i n (1).
I n 1 9 0 1 t h e s u b s t a n c e was t e s t e d p h a r m a c o l o g i c a l l y
by K o b e r t - R o s t o d k ( 2 ) and was f o u n d t o p o s s e s s
remarkable a n e s t h e t i c p r o p e r t i e s . I n e a r l y 1902
d i f f e r e n t f o r m u l a t i o n s of e t h y l p-aminobenzoa t e ,
powder, p a s t e , l o z e n g e s , d r a g e e s and o i n t m e n t , were
b r o u g h t i n t h e m a r k e t u n d e r t h e t r a d e - n a m e o f Ane-
s t h e s i n ( 3 ) . L a t e r on i n 1 9 0 4 F. B u c k a ' s "Kopf-Phar-
macy" i n F r a n k f u r t am Main was f u r t h e r i n v o l v e d i n
marketing of A n e s t h e s i n p r o d u c t s .
2. Description
2.1. Name, Formula, M o l e c u l a r Weight.
E t h y l p-aminobenzoae; B e n z o c a i n e , b e n z o i c a c i d ,
4-amino e t h y l e s t e r ; E t h o f o r m ;
C9H1N02 165.19
NH2
2.2. A p p e a r a n c e , C o l o u r , Odour. White o r c o l o u r -
l e s s c r y s t a l s o r c r y s t a l l i n e powder w i t h a b i t t e r
t a s t e , f o l l o w e d by l o c a l a n e s t h e s i a o f t h e t o n g u e ,
almost odourless.
3 . S y n t h e s i s B e n z o c a i n e c o u l d be s y n t h e s i s e d i n
number o f ways. p - N i t r o b e n z o i c a c i d i s e s t e r i f i e d
and t h e r e s u l t i n g p r o d u c t i s r e d u c e d w i t h m e t a l l i c
t i n and h y d r o c h l o r i c a c i d ( 4 ) o r h y d r o g e n i n p r e -
s e n c e o f p l a t i n u m o x i d e ( 5 ) t o e t h y l p-aminoben-
z o a t e . O t h e r methods a r e t h e e s t e r i f i c a t i o n o f
p-aminobenzoic a c i d ( 6 ) o r t h e r e d u c t i o n o f e t h y l
p - n i t r o b e n z o a t e w i t h ammonium s u l p h i d e (7) .
S t a r t i n g w i t h n i t r o t o l u e n e benzocaine can a l s o be
s y n t h e s i s e d a s shown i n F i g . 1 ( 8 ) .
BENZOCAINE 75
Fig. 1
V a r i o u s s a l t s o f b e n z o c a i n e w i t h b e n z e n e - , naph-
t h a l i n a n d phenolsulphonic a c i d s have been synthe-
s i s e d and f o u n d t o b e o f t h e r a p e u t i c v a l u e ( 9 ) .
4. Physical Properties
4.1. M e l t i n g Range. B e n z o c a i n e melts b e t w e e n
88-92OCI b u t t h e r a n g e b e t w e e n b e g i n n i n g and end
of m e l t i n g d o e s n o t exceed 2O ( 1 0 ) .
4.2. S o l u b i l i t y (11) The s o l u b i l i t y o f b e n z o c a i n e
i n v a r i o u s s o l v e n t s a t 2OoC i s g i v e n i n Table 1
as 1 p a r t per s p e c i f i e d p a r t s - s o l v e n t .
Table 1
S o l u b i l i t y o f b e n z o c a i n e a t 20’C
Solvent Solubility
Water 2500
A 1c o h o 1 5
Chloroform 2
Ether 4
Almond o i l o r o l i v e o i l 30-50
Mineral a c i d s s o l u b l e under s a l t
f o r ma t i o n
4.3. D i s s o c i a t i o n C o n s t a n t . A c i d d i s s o c i a t i o n c o n -
s t a n t o f b e n z o c a i n e h a s b e e n g i v e n a s pK, 2.5
( 1 2 ) . E s t i m a t i o n o f m i c r o q u i l i b r i u m c o n s t a n t of
e t h y l p - a m i n o b e n z o a t e was d o n e s p e c t r o h o t o -
m e t r i c a l l y and a K v a l u e o f 4.17 x 10-0 was
o b t a i n e d . S p e c t r o p h o t o m e t r i c method a p p l i e d f o r
e s t i m a t i n g m i c r o e q u i l i b i r i u m c o n s t a n t s is simp-
l e r , f a s t e r and more a c c u r a t e t h a n t h e c o n v e n -
76 SYED LAIK ALI
t i o n a l method e m p l o y i n g t h e d i s s o c i a t i o n c o n s t a n t
o f an a l k y l a t e d d e r i v a t i v e ( 1 3 ) .
4.4. Loss on D r y i n q . When d r i e d t o c o n s t a n t w e i g h t
a t a p r e s s u r e n o t e x c e e d i n g 20 cm Hg l o o s e s n o t
more t h a n 0.5 p e r c e n t o f i t s w e i g h t , (11).
4.5. U l t r a v i o l e t S p e c t r u m ( 1 4 ) . B e n z o c a i n e i n
s o l u t i o n absorbs u l t r a v i o l e t r a d i a t i o n t o produce
s p e c t r u m w i t h d i f f e r e n t maxima i n d i f f e r e n t s o l u -
t i o n s . I n methanol o r e t h a n o l , 0 . 1 N H C l and 0 . 1 N
NaOH i t h a s a b s o r p t i o n maxima a t 220, 292, 270,
226 and 284 nm r e s p e c t i v e l y . The c o r r e s o n d i n g
m o l e c u l a r e x t i n c t i o n c o e f f i c i e n t s and APb v a l u e s
a r e reported as following ( 1 4 ) . 1C H
€ 20580
8890
1310
12720
16550
The UV s p e c t r a a r e g i v e n i n F i g . 2.
4.6. I n f r a r e d Spectrum. The i n f r a r e d s p e c t r u m of
b e n z o c a i n e is g i v e n i n F i g . 3. The s p e c t r u m was
o b t a i n e d w i t h P e r k i n - E l m e r 257 s p e c t r o p h o t o m e t e r
from a KBr p e l l e t . The s t r u c t u r a l a s s i g n m e n t s may
b e c o r r e l a t e d w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g band f r e q u e n c i e s
e n c v ( cm - 1 1
Assignment
3200-3500 c h a r a c t e ristic s t r e t c h i n g
v i b r a t i o n s o f primary
amino g r o u p
1680 characteristic stretching
v i b r a t i o n s o f C=O g r o u p i n
ester
1 6 0 0 and 1 5 1 0 c h a r a c t e ristic skeletal
s t r e t c h i n g v i b r a t i o n s of
the aromatic ring
1250-1310; 1100-1150 c h a r a c t e r i s t i c C-0 s t r e t -
ching v i b r a t i o n s
BENZOCAINE 77
A i n nm-
Chemical S h i f t ( ) Assignment
1 . 3 2 ppm m e t h y l p r o t o n s of e t h y l g r o u p
4.28 ppm p r o t o n s o f amino g r o u p
4.31 ppm m t h y l e n e p r o t o n s of e t h y l g r o u p
6.62 ppm two a r o m a t i c p r o t o n s a d j a c e n t
t o ester group
7.88 ppm two a r o m a t i c p r o t o n s a d j a c e n t
t o amino g r o u p
4.8. Mass S p e c t r u m .
Mass S p e c t r u m is g i v e n i n F i g . 5
I n s t r u m e n t : V a r i a n MAT 4 4
Sample t e m p e r a t u r e ( d i r e c t i n l e t ) : 8OoC
Source temperature: 2 0 0 0 ~
E l e c t r o n e n e r g y : 70 e V
The p r o m i n e n t i o n s of t h i s s p e c t r u m c a n be
c o r r e l a t e d t o t h e structure a s following:
m/e 1 6 5 = M ; 1 3 6 = M
120 = M -
- C2H5
C2H5O; 92 = M - COOC2H5
4.9. D i f f e r e n t i a l Thermal A n a l y s i s ( 1 5 , 1 6 , 1 7 )
The two-component s y s t e m b e n z o c a i n e - p i c r i c a c i d h a s
b e e n s t u d i e d i n o r d e r t o e l u c i d a t e some d i s c r e p a n -
c i e s c o n c e r n i n g t h e m e l t i n g p o i n t s of benzocaine
p i c r a t e . Two m o d i f i c a t i o n s , a m e t a s t a b l e o n e w i t h
m.p. 129O and a s t a b l e o n e w i t h m.p. 162O a r e
known. I t was shown by B o r k a ( 1 6 ) t h a t t h e e q u i -
molar p i c r a t e y i e l d s f o u r p o l y m o r p h i c f o r m s , and &
d i m o r p h i c i n h o m o g e n e o u s l y me1 t i n g p i c r a t e w i t h t h e
c o m p o s i t i o n o f 2 mole b e n z o c a i n e : 1 mole p i c r i c
a c i d . The s o l i d - s o l i d t r a n s f o r m a t i o n of t h e l o w
melting modification i n t o t h e high-melting stable
form i s r e p o r t e d . The s t a b l e m o d i f i c a t i o n c a n be
o b t a i n e d by e x c e s s i v e d r y i n g of t h e i s o l a t e d sub-
s t a n c e a t 105O. The t h e r m a l e n e r g y i n t r o d u c e d i s
SYED LAIK ALI
.-V
€ ................... .....................
2E .
Y
... ...
8 ...
...
w
AT
U
13 1 I
i
5 8b 120 160
Temperature "C
.-U
E
L
B
Y
2 ........................................
.... ::
w *.
AT ..
..
.-V ....
E
b, 5
50
'13
C
w
c
0
u I
C 1 . 1
, . I I
Temperature "C
Fig. g Differential thermal analysis of
benzocaine picrate (Form 11) showing
crystal transformation to form I
82 SYED LAIK ALI
consumed by t h e c r y s t a l s which i n t u r n u n d e r g o
s o l i d - s o l i d t r a n s f o r m a t i o n from t h e l o w - m e l t i n g
metastable m o d i f i c a t i o n t o t h e high-me1 t i n g s t a b l e
form. The i n f r a r e d s p e c t r a of t h e two m o d i f i c a t i o n s
e x h i b i t some d i f f e r e n c e s , m a i n l y i n t h e 3500 cm'l
and t h e 1 5 0 0 - 1 7 0 0 cm'l r e g i o n .
D i f f e r e n t i a l t h e r m a l a n a l y s i s u s i n g a Mettler TA
2000 a p p a r a t u s was a p p l i e d f o r t h e i n v e s t i g a t i o n o f
b e n z o c a i n e p i c r a t e polymorphs. A p p r o x i m a t e l y 2 mg
o f t h e polymorphs were u s e d f o r e a c h a n a l y s i s . I n
F i g . 6 - 9 d i f f e r e n t i a l thermograms o f two polymor-
p h i c forms, o b t a i n e d under d i f f e r e n t c o n d i t i o n s a r e
g i v e n . The e n t h a l p h y c h a n g e 4 H f o r s t a b l e f o r m
( f o r m I ) was c a l c u l a t e d t o be 47.10 Cal g'l and
f o r t h e m e t a s t a b l e f o r m ( f o r m 11) 30.77 C a l 9-1.
5. I d e n t i f i c a t i o n and C o l o u r R e a c t i o n s .
B e n z o c a i n e g- i v e s c h a r a c t e r i s t i c r e a c t i o n s o f a n
a r o m a t i c amine. A f t e r d i s s o l v i n g i t i n water and
a d d i t i o n o f few d r o p s 3 N h y d r o c h l o r i c a c i d and
1 0 b sodium n i t r i t e f o l l o w e d b y 2 m l o f a s o l u -
t i o n o f 1 0 0 mg 2 - n a p h t o l i n 5 m l 1 N sodium hy-
d r o x i d e a n o r a n g e - r e d p r e c i p i t a t e i s formed ( 1 0 ) .
B e n z o c a i n e s o l u t i o n i n d i l u t e HC1 ( 2 0 mg i n 3 d r o p s
o f 2 M HC1) s p e a r a t e s on a d d i t i o n o f 1 m l water
and 5 d r o p s o f i o d i n e d a r k brown o i l d r o p s o f
per i o d i d e ( 1 8 ) . An i n t e n s e r e d - v i o l e t c o l o u r a t i o n
i s o b t a i n e d when 1 m l p h e n o l (1%) and 2 d r o p s o f
p o t a s s i u m b r o m a t e s o l u t i o n (0.1N) a r e added t o
b e n z o c a i n e s o l u t i o n i n d i l u t e HC1 ( 5 mg i n 2 m l
2 M HC1) ( 1 8 ) . B e n z o c a i n e g i v e s w i t h p i c r i c a c i d
s o l u t i o n a y e l l o w c r i s t a l l i n e p r e c i p i t a t e which
a f t e r washing w i t h water and d r y i n g a t 105OC
melts b e t w e e n 124-13OoC ( 1 9 ) . S a l t s o f b e n z o c a i n e
with v a r i o u s s u l f o n i c acids with d i f f e r e n t melting
p o i n t s a r e known. S a l t s w i t h p - t o l o u e n e s u l f o n i c
a c i d (m.P. : 185-187OC) , w i t h w - t o l u e n e s u l f o n i c
acid ( d e c o m p o s e s a t 235OC), w i t h b e n z e n e d i s u l -
f o n i c a c i d (decomposes a t 235OC), w i t h 2 and
4-phenol s u l f o n i c a c i d s r e s p e c t i v e l y (m.p. :
201-203O and 1 9 6 - 198OC), w i t h a n i s o l e s u l -
f o n i c a c i d (m.p. : 188OC) w i t h p h e n o l d i s u l f o n i c
a c i d (m.p. : 220 - 221OC) , w i t h 2 - o x y n a p h t h a l i n
s u l f o n i c a c i d and g u a j a c o l s u l f o n i c a c i d (m.p.
175OC) a r e known ( 2 0 ) .
BENZOCAINE 83
6. D e g r a d a t i o n and S t a b i l i t y . E s t e r h y d r o l i s e s of
b e n z o c a i n e i n a u u e o u s media i s well known ( 2 1 1 .
A t t e m p t s h a v e b e e n made t o decrease i t s d e g r a d a t i o n
t h r o u g h t h e use of c o m p l e x i n g a g e n t s and s u r f a c -
t a n t s . T h e a p p l i c a t i o n of m o l e c u l a r complex forma-
t i o n a s a means of d r u g s o l u b i l i z a t i o n and s t a b i l i -
s a t i o n h a s been s t u d i e d . C a f f e i n e i n i n c r e a s i n g
c o n c e n t r a t i o n s h a s b e e n used as complexing a g e n t t o
i n h i b i t the benzocaine d e g r a d a t i o n i n barium
h y d r o x i d e s o l u t i o n ( F i g . 1 0 ) (22,231. The i n f l u e n c e
of b e t a - c y c l o d e x t r i n on t h e base c a t a l y z e d d e g r a -
d a t i o n of b e n z o c a i n e h a s b e e n i n v e s t i g a t e d . K i n e t i c
d a t a p r e s e n t e d s u b s t a n t i a t e s t h e p o s t u l a t e d 1:l
s t o i c h i o m e t r i e r a t i o f o r t h e benzocaine-cyclodex-
t r i n i n t e r a c t i o n . T h i s shows t h a t t h e d e g r e e of
r e t a r d a t i o n of b e n z o c a i n e h y d r o l y s i s i s c o n s i d e -
r a b l e g r e a t e r than t h a t observed f o r t h e c a f f e i n e -
t y p e complexes i n d i c a t i n g a n i n t e r a c t i o n i n v o l v i n g
t h e i n c l u s i o n f o r m a t i o n and o t h e r a t t r a c t i v e f o r c e s
(24) ( F i g . 11 and 1 2 ) . C a t a l y s i s and i n h i b i t i o n of
t h e a l k a l i n e h y d r o l y s i s of b e n z o c a i n e and a n a l o g s
by c a t i o n i c s u r f a c t a n t s h a s a l s o b e e n r e p o r t e d (25).
S t a b i l i t y c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s of b e n z o c a i n e i n c l u d i n g
t h e e f f e c t s o f pH and p h o s p h a t e i o n s have b e e n
i n v e s t i g a t e d (26). B e n z o c a i n e d e g r a d a t i o n i s b o t h
a c i d and base c a t a l y z e d b u t is much s l o w e r i n t h e
p r e s e n c e of p h o s p h a t e i o n . S t a b i l i t y s t u d i e s were
p e r f o r m e d a t 25, 4 0 , 60 and 7OoC and a t pH v a l u e s
2, 7 and 11 (26). A t a l l t h r e e p H v a l u e s t h e d e g r a -
d a t i o n r a t e was s l o w e r i n 0.11 M p h o s p h a t e b u f f e r
t h a n i n water. T h u s b e n z o c a i n e was a p p r o x i m a t e l y
1 . 3 ( a t pH 7) 7.3 ( a t pH 2) and 8.0 ( a t pH 11)
times more s t a b l e i n p h o s p h a t e b u f f e r t h a n i n
n o n b u f f e r e d s o l u t i o n s of e q u i v a l e n t pH. E x t r a p o l a -
t i o n of t h e e l e v a t e d t e m p e r a t u r e d a t a t o room
temperature resul t e d i n a p r e d i c t e d f i r s t - o r d e r
r a t e c o n s t a n t of 0.0057 h r ' l , w h i c h compares
f a v o u r a b l y w i t h t h e r a t e c o n s t a n t o f 0.0051 h r - 1
o b s e r v e d a t room temperature. p-Aminobenzoic a c i d
was found t o be t h e o n l y d e c o m p o s i t i o n product.
E s s e n t i a l l y a l l t h e benzocaine l o s t due to degrada-
t i o n was a c c o u n t e d f o r b y t h e a p p e a r a n c e of p-amino-
b e n z o i c a c i d (26). B e n z o c a i n e i n a t h r o a t l o s z e n g e
f o r m u l a t i o n was f o u n d t o be u n s t a b l e w i t h v a r i o u s
e x c i p i e n t s . F r a c t i o n a l f a c t o r i a l experiments iden-
t i f i e d t h e e x c i p i e n t s c i t r i c a c i d , c o r n s y r u p and
SYED LAIK ALI
84
Fig. 10 I n f l u e n c e of i n c r e a s j n y c a f f e i n e -
c o n c e n t r a t i o n , 0 . 2 5 % (-0-1 ,
0.5% (-o-), 1.0% (-o-), 1.5%
(-m-), 2 . 0 % (-A-) and 2.5%
(-A-) o n t h e h y d r o l y s i s of
b e n z o c a i n e i n 0 . 0 4 n bar&um
h y d r o x i d e s o l u t i o n a t 30 C
L
c
C
2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 0 10
Time Ch3 d l i m e Chi+
Fig. 1 1 Influence of beta Fig. 12 Influence of temperatures
cyclodextrin on benzocaine on benzocaine hydrolysks in 0.04N
hydro&ysis in 0.01N Ba(0H) Ba(OH)2, Key: A, with betacyclo-
at 30 C dex tr in :B, without bet acyc lodext P in
86 SYED LAIK ALI
n a t u r a l c h e r r y f l a v o u r a s t h e c a u s e s o f t h e incom-
p a t i b i l i t y . The p r i m a r y aromatic amine g r o u p i n g
i n s t e a d o f t h e e s t e r l i n k a g e o f b e n z o c a i n e was
involved i n t h e s t a b i l i t y problem ( 2 7 ) . I n a n o t h e r
i n v e s t i g a t i o n of 23 d i f f e r e n t b e n z o c a i n e f o r m u l a -
t i o n s some were 'found t o c o n t a i n n o t t h e l a b e l l e d
amount o f b e n z o c a i n e . p-Aminobenzoic a c i d c o u l d n o t
b e d e t e c t e d i n any o f t h e s u b s t a n d a r d b e n z o c a i n e
f o r m u l a t i o n s ( 2 8 ) . I n o n e of t h e s e f o r m u l a t i o n s a
compound h a v i n g t h e s t r u c t u r a l f o r m u l a
-CH=N COOC~HS
0
was i d e n t i f i e d t h r o u g h mass s p e c t r a a f t e r g a s
chromatographic s e p a r a t i o n (29) .
The i n f l u e n c e of a p r o t e c t i v e c o a t i n g o f b e n z o c a i n e
a s s u n s c r e e n i n g a g e n t upon t h e p h o t o s t a b i l i t y o f
dyes h a s been s t u d i e d . Colour s t a b i l i t y of t a b l e t s
c o a t e d w i t h c e r t i f i e d d y e s were t e s t e d . The p r o t e c -
t i v e e f f e c t o f t h e UV a b s o r b e r b e n z o c a i n e a p p e a r d
most e f f e c t i v e f o r F D and C y e l l o w no. 6 when
a p p l i e d a s t h e m o d i f i e d s u g a r c o a t or t h e f i l m c o a t
(30)
The e f f e c t o f p l a s t i c i z e r s on t h e i n t e r a c t i o n o f
PVC w i t h b e n z o c a i n e h a s b e e n i n v e s t i g a t e d (31).
R e s u l t s show t h a t d r u g p e r m e a b i l i t y i n c r e a s e s w i t h
p l a t i c i z e r c o n c e n t r a t i o n and t e m p e r a t u r e , w h i l s t
s o r p t i o n i n c r e a s e s with p l a s t i c i z e r c o n c e n t r a t i o n
and d e c r e a s e s w i t h t e m p e r a t u r e . The e f f e c t o f ATBC
( a c e t y l t r i - n - b u t y l c i t r a t e ) i s more p r o n o u n c e d
t h a n t h a t o f DEHP ( d i - 2 - e t h y l h e x y l p h t h a l a t e ) f o r
b o t h s o r p t i o n and p e r m e a t i o n p r o c e s s e s . The i n t e r -
a c t i o n o f PolyHEMA, a polymer w i d e l y u s e d i n t h e
m a n u f a c t u r e o f c o n t a c t l e n s e s , w i t h b e n z o c a i n e was
s t u d i e d a t 3OoC. b e n z o c a i n e was s o r p e d i n a r e v e r -
s i b l e manner and g a v e l i n e a r u p t a k e i s o t h e r m s (32).
The t r a n s p o r t of b e n z o c a i n e t h r o u g h a n y l o n 6
membrane was i n v e s t i g a t e d a s a f u n c t i o n of tempera-
t u r e ( 1 0 - 7OoC), c o n c e n t r a t i o n ( 0 . 6 , 1.1 and
6.0 x 10'3M), membrane a r e a and pH i n a s i m p l e
a l l - g l a s s p e r m e a t i o n c e l l . F i g . 1 3 shows t h e i n f l u -
e n c e of pH on t h e a p p a r e n t p e r m e a b i l i t y c o e f f i c i e n t
BENZOCAINE 87
c
t
n
I
ul
N
E
c!
I
Q
X
Y
PH -
Fig. 1 3 Influence of p H on t h e apparent
permeabflity coefficients for
6 x 1 0 M benzocaine trassfer across
a nylon 6 membrane at 50 C
f o r 6 x 10’3M b e n z o c a i n e t r a n s f e r a c r o s s a n y l o n
6 membrane ( 3 3 ) . The i n f l u e n c e o f p h a s e t r a n s i t i o n s
on t h e s o r p t i o n of b e n z o c a i n e b y p o l y a m i d e membra-
n e s h a s a l s o b e e n i n v e s t i g a t e d . The s o r p t i o n of
b e n z o c a i n e by non-or i e n t e d p o l y a m i d e membranes h a s
b e e n s t u d i e d a s ‘a f u n c t i o n o f temperature o v e r t h e
r a n g e 1 0 - 8OoC ( 3 4 ) .
7. D i s s o l u t i o n , L i b e r a t i o n and D i f f u s i o n
T h e i n c r e a s e d s o l u b i l i t y o f b e n z o c a i n e i n t h e pre-
s e n c e of v a r i o u s c o m p l e x i n g a g e n t s was a t t r i b u t e d
t o t h e f o r m a t i o n o f s o l u b l e c o m p l e x e s ( 3 5 ) . The
p o s s i b l e i n t e r a c t i o n s i n a mu1 t i c o m p o n e n t s y s t e m
c o n t a i n i n g b e n z o c a i n e , s o d i u m s a l i c y l a t e and PEG
300 were i n v e s t i g a t e d by d i s s o l u t i o n methods. D i s s o -
l u t i o n s t u d i e s i n d i c a t e t h e e x i s t e n c e of s y n e r g i s t i c
e f f e c t b e t w e e n sodium s a l i c y l a t e and PEG 300 on t h e
d i s s o l u t i o n r a t e of b e n z o c a i n e powder. The e f f e c t
is c o r r e l a t e d t o t h e s u r f a c e t e n s i o n measurement o f
sodium s a l i c y l a t e and PEG 300 s o l u t i o n s . D i s s o l u -
t i o n medium was s t i r r e d a t 7 5 rpm u s i n g a PTFE
20 40 60 20 40 60
Time L m i n J d Time Lminl-
r e c t a n g u l a r b l a d e ( 4 . 5 cm by 1 . 7 cm) c o n n e c t e d by a
g l a s s rod ( d i a m e t e r : 6 mm) t o a c o n s t a n t s p e e d
motor. The r a t e o f d i s s o l u t i o n o f b e n z o c a i n e powder
is g r e a t l y i n c r e a s e d i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f e i t h e r
s o d i u m s a l i c y l a t e o r PEG 300. F i g . 1 4 and 1 5 i l l u -
s t r a t e t h e d i s s o l u t i o n p a t t e r n of b e n z o c a i n e ( 3 6 ) .
Spectral c h a n g e s observed i n b e n z o c a i n e - sodium
s a l i c y l a t e system have a l s o been r e p o r t e d ( 3 7 ) .
The i n v i t r o s t u d y o f d r u g r e l e a s e t h r o u g h s i l i -
c o n e r u b b e r membranes of b e n z o c a i n e s u s p e n d e d i n
carbomer h y d r o g e l s c o n t a i n i n g d i f f e r e n t concen-
t r a t i o n s o f low m o l e c u l a r w e i g h t p o l y o l s ( e t h y -
l e n e g l y c o l , p r o p y l e n e g l y c o l , g l y c e r o l and s o r -
b i t o l ) was s t u d i e d t o e s t a b l i s h g e n e r a l p r i n c i p -
l e s and p r o c e d u r e s f o r c o n t r o l o f t h e e f f e c t s o n
p e r c u t a n e o u s a b s o r p t i o n c a u s e d by c h a n g e s i n d r u g
s o l u b i l i t y and or d i f f u s i v i t y i n t h e v e h i c l e . Benzo-
c a i n e was s e l e c t e d a s a model o f n e u t r a l d r u g w i t h
low water s o l u b i l i t y . The e f f e c t o f t h e a d d i t i v e s
on t h e r e l e a s e is e x p r e s s e d i n terms o f t h e r e l a -
t i v e r e l e a s e d amount, i.e. t h e r a t i o of t h e amount
of drug r e l e a s e d from each a d d i t i v e - c o n t a i n i n g g e l
t o t h e amount released f r o m e a c h a d d i t i v e - f r e e g e l .
The e x p e r i m e n t a l v a l u e s a r e c o r r e l a t e d w i t h v a l u e s
c a l c u l a t e d by a s i m p l e e q u a t i o n i n v o l v i n g known
measurable parameters such a s t h e drug concentra-
t i o n i n t h e g e l , t h e d r u g s o l u b i l i t y i n t h e pure
l i q u i d p h a s e and t h e v i s c o s i t y o f t h i s p h a s e ( 3 8 ) .
The release of b e n z o c a i n e f r o m s u p p o s i t o r i e s h a s
b e e n i n v e s t i g a t e d u s i n g a c o n t i n u o u s Flow Bead-Bed
D i s s o l u t i o n A p p a r a t u s . B e n z o c a i n e was s e l e c t e d a s a
model compound w i t h b o t h a low m e l t i n g (33.5 - 35.5%)
and a h i g h m e l t i n g ( 3 7 - 39%) g l y c e r i d e - t y p e
s u p p o s i t o r y b a s e . I n v i t r o release of b e n z o c a i n e
d e c r e a s e d as t h e m e l t i n g p o i n t o f t h e s u p p o s i t o r y
i n c r e a s e d . The a p p a r a t u s c o n s i s t e d o f a g l a s s b e a d -
bed c o n t a i n i n g t h e s u p p o s i t o r y . A c o n t i n o u s f l o w o f
l i q u i d was p a s s e d t h r o u g h t h e bead-bed a t a c o n -
s t a n t r a t e . Direct c o n t a c t o f t h e s u p p o s i t o r y was
m a i n t a i n e d w i t h t h e d i s s o l u t i o n medium, c o n f i n i n g
t h e s u p p o s i t o r y w i t h i n t h e b e a d s . Drug release was
a f f e c t e d by t h e t e m p e r a t u r e o f t h e d i s s o l u t i o n
media, i n c r e a s i n g , d e c r e a s i n g a n d i n c r e a s i n g a g a i n
a t c e r t a i n t e m p e r a t u r e s . Dependence o f b e n z o c a i n e
release f r o m s u p p o s i t o r y b a s e a s a f u n c t i o n o f
90 SYED LAIK ALI
t e m p e r a t u r e was d e m o n s t r a t e d ( 3 9 ) ( F i g . 1 6 ) .
The r e l e a s e of b e n z o c a i n e from o i n t m e n t b a s e s and
t h e i n f l u e n c e of e m u l g a t i n g a g e n t s s u c h a s Span,
Tween and o t h e r l i p o p h i l i c a g e n t s , s u c h a s propy-
l e n e g l y c o l m o n o l a u r a t e and s o r b i t a n m o n o l a u r a t e
h a s been s t u d i e d ( 4 0 , 4 1 , 4 2 , 4 3 , 4 4 ) . D i s s o l u t i o n
s t u d i e s c o n d u c t e d i n m i c e l l a r s o l u t i o n c l e a r l y show
t h a t d i s s o l u t i o n r a t e is n o t p r o p o r t i o n a l t o t h e
a p p a r e n t s o l u b i l i t y of t h e d r u g . T h i s was f i r s t
d e m o n s t r a t e d by H i g u c h i ( 4 5 ) who found t h a t t h e
r a t i o of d i s s o l u t i o n of b e n z o c a i n e i n p o l y s o r b a t e
80 s o l u t i o n t o t h a t w i t h o u t t h e s u r f a c t a n t was
s u b s t a n t i a l l y lower t h a n t h e r a t i o p r e d i c t e d by t h e
Noyes-Whitney t h e o r y . Mechanism of s u r f a c t a n t
e f f e c t s on t h e drug a b s o r p t i o n h a s been r e p r o t e d i n
a review a r t i c l e ( 4 6 ) .
The d i f f u s i o n , p e n e t r a t i o n and s u r f a c e e f f e c t s o f
benzocaine i n c o r p o r a t e d i n v a r i o u s polyethylene
g l y c o l o i n t m e n t b a s e s t h r o u g h human s t r a t u m corneum
h a s been s t u d i e d . R e s u l t s showed a d e c r e a s e i n d r u g
d i f f u s i o n i n t h e p r e s e n c e of r e l a t i v e l y h i g h amounts
of t h e l o w e r m o l e c u l a r weight p o r t i o n s of p o l y e t h y -
l e n e g l y c o l . Thermal a n a l y s i s i n d i c a t e d t h a t benzo-
c a i n e d i s s o l v e s i n p o l y e t h y l e n e g l y c o l . T h i s would
imply an a l t e r a t i o n of t h e r e l e a s e - p a t t e r n i f t h e
p o l y e t h y l e n e g l y c o l c o m p o s i t i o n is a1 tered ( 4 7 ) .
The i n f l u e n c e of f o r m u l a t i o n , m a n u f a c t u r i n g v a r i -
a b l e s and t e m p e r a t u r e on i n v i t r o r e l e a s e of benzo-
c a i n e d i s s o l v e d i n g e l - t y p e o i l y v e h i c l e s h a s been
repor ted (48) .
The t r a n s p o r t of benzocaine along w i t h o t h e r
p-aminobenzoate e s t e r s t h r o u g h a t u b u l a r d i m e t h y l
p o l y s i l o x a n e membrane i n t o a f l o w i n g l i q u i d was
examined. T h e o b s e r v e d t r a n s p o r t b e h a v i o u r r a n g e d
from c o m p l e t e c o n v e c t i v e d i f f u s i o n c o n t r o l f o r t h e
h e x y l ester t o c o m p l e t e membrane c o n t r o l f o r benzo-
c a i n e . The i m p l i c a t i o n s of convectiv e d i f f u s i o n a l
c o n s i d e r a t i o n s t o i n t e s t i n a l a b s o r p t i o n and d i s s o -
l u t i o n s t u d i e s have been d i s c u s s e d ( 4 9 ) .
The i n v i t r o r e l e a s e of b e n z o c a i n e from o l e a g i n o u s ,
a b s o r p t i o n , e m u l s i o n and w a t e r s o l u b l e o i n t m e n t
v e h i c l e s t h r o u g h a c e l l u l o s e membrane t o a n a q u e o u s
s i n k was s t u d i e d a t 37.5OC and was d e m o n s t r a t e d
t h a t v e h i c l e c o m p o s i t i o n markedly a f f e c t e d t h e r a t e
of r e l e a s e of t h e a c t i v e i n g r e d i e n t ( S O ) . The
e f f e c t of s u p p o s i t o r y v e h i c l e , drug c o n c e n t r a t i o n
and n o n i o n i c s u r f a c t a n t s on i n v i t r o d i a l y s i s
t h r o u g h a c e l l u l o s e membrane were s t u d i e d . I n v i t r o
d i a l y s i s correlated w e l l with i n vivo absorption
and d r u g r e l e a s e was g r e a t e r from w a t e r - s o l u b l e
v e h i c l e s t h a n from o l e a g n i o u s v e h i c l e s . I n c l u s i o n
of a n o n i o n i c h y d r o p h i l i c o r l i p o p h i l i c s u r f a c t a n t
( s o r b i t a n m o n o l a u r a t e , p o l y s o r b a t e 80) i n c o c a b u t -
ter resulted i n a s t a t i s t i c a l l y s i g n i f i c a n t i n c r e a s e
f o r i n v i t r o drug r e l e a s e , while a l i p o p h i l i c sur-
f a c t a n t showed l i t t l e e f f e c t i n v i v o and a hydro-
p h i l i c s u r f a c t a n t depressed r e l e a s e i n v i v o . Both
t y p e s of s u r f a c t a n t s had s m a l l e f f e c t s on r e l e a s e
from p o l y e t h y l e n e g y l c o l . Some f o r m u l a t i o n s f a c t o r
o t h e r t h a n t h e c o n c e n t r a t i o n of b e n z o c a i n e a f f e c t e d
t h e r e l a t i v e amounts of b e n z o c a i n e r e l e a s e d i n
v i t r o from t h e c o m m e r c i a l l y a v a i l a b l e p r o d u c t s
examined. The d i a l y s i s method is u s e f u l f o r e v a l u -
a t i n g t h e e f f e c t s of f o r m u l a t i o n on d r u g r e l e a s e
from s u p p o s i t o r i e s (51).
92 SYED LAIK ALI
8. Method o f A n a l y s i s
Titrimetry. T i t r a t i o n of benzocaine d i s s o l v e d
i n h y d r o c h l o r i c a c i d w i t h sodium n i t r i t e s o l u t i o n
using t h e s t a r c h - i o d i d e paper a s an e x t e r n a l i n d i -
c a t o r is t h e a s s a y method used i n U n i t e d S t a t e s
Pharmacopea (10)'. E n d p o i n t c a n a l s o be d e t e r m i n e d
p o t e n t i o me t r i c a l l y a p p l y i ng a c a l o me1 - p l a t i n u m
e l e c t r o d e system. I n assay methods o f BP 8 0 (52)
and e u r o p e a n pharmacopoea (53) b e n z o c a i n e is d i s s o l -
ved i n d i l u t e H C l , a b o u t 3 g p o t a s s i u m bromide
a d d e d , s o l u t i o n c o o l e d w i t h ice and t h e n t i t r a t e d
a m p e r o m e t r i c a l l y w i t h 0.1 M sodium n i t r i t e s o l u t i o n
u s i n g a d o u b l e p l a t i n u m wire e l e c t r o d e . B r o m i n a t i o n
o f b e n z o c a i n e i n a c e t i c a c i d s o l u t i o n u s i n g a mix-
t u r e of p o t a s s i u m bromide and 1 N potassium b r o m a t e
i n d i l u t e HC1 i s p e r f o r m e d a s a n i n d i r e c t a s s a y
method o f b e n z o c a i n e . On a d d i t i o n o f p o t a s s i u m
i o d i d e t h e e x c e s s of l i b e r a t e d bromine r e a c t s tr,
g i v e f r e e i o d i n e w h i c h is b a c k t i t r a t e d w i t h a s t a n -
d a r d t h i o s u l p h a t e s o l u t i o n . B e n z o c a i n e c a n be t h u s
e v a l u a t e d i n d i r e c t l y t h r o u g h t h e amount of s t a n d a r d
p o t a s s i u m bromate consumed (54). B e n z o c a i n e c a n
d i r e c t l y be t i t r a t e d w i t h p o t a s s i u m b r o m a t e a f t e r
d i s s o l v i n g i t i n 25 % H C l , a d d i n g potassium b r o m i d e
and u s i n g methyl red a s a n i n d i c a t o r (55) o r ampero-
m e t r i c a l l y u s i n g a d o u b l e p l a t i n u m e l e c t r o d e (56).
A non-aqueous t i t r a t i o n of b e n z o c a i n e w i t h
p e r c h l o r i c a c i d u s i n g c r y s t a l v i o l e t a s an i n d i -
c a t o r is a l s o known (57).
C o l o r i m e t r i c A n a l y s i s . A c o l o r i m e t r i c method f o r
t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n of s u b s t a n c e s c o n t a i n i n g a
p r i m a r y aromatic m i n e s u c h a s b e n z o c a i n e i s based
upon d i a z o t i s a t i o n , c o u p l i n g w i t h N ( l - n a p h t y l )
e t h y l e n e d i a m i n e h y d r o c h l o r i d e and measuring a t 545
nm (58,59,60,61). O t h e r c o u p l i n g a g e n t s r e p o r t e d i n
l i t e r a t u r e a r e o( - n a p h t y l a m i n e thymol i n a l k a l i n e
s o l u t i o n (63) and 2 - n a p h t o l (61). C o l o r i m e t r i c
d e t e r m i n a t i o n of b e n z o c a i n e is a l s o p e r f o r m e d a f t e r
r e a c t i o n w i t h p-dimethylaminobenzaldehyde (65) A
c o l o r i m e t r i c d e t e r m i n a t i o n of benzocaine between
.
505-520 nm a f t e r r e a c t i n g w i t h h y d r o x y l a m i n e and
i r o n (111) s a l t s i s a l s o known (66). R e a c t i o n w i t h
sodium 1,2-naphthochinon-4-sulfonate and c o l o r i -
metric d e t e r m i n a t i o n b e t w e e n 460-480 nm is a l s o
r e p o r t e d (67,68). C o l o r i m e t r i c d e t e r m i n a t i o n s o f
BENZOCAINE 93
b e n z o c a i n e a f t e r r e a c t i o n w i t h : v a n i l l i n e and measu-
r i n g b e t w e e n 380-410 nm ( 6 9 1 , w i t h 9 - c h l o r o a c r i d i n e
and m e a s u r i n g a t 435 ( 7 0 1 , w i t h n i t r o u s a c i d and
m e a s u r i n g b e t w e e n 390-430 nm a r e known ( 7 1 , 7 2 ) . Use
o f Bindon f o r t h e q u a n t i t a t i v e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f
benzocaine has a l s o been r e p o r t e d ( 7 3 ) .
Fluorimetry. Local a n e s t h e t i c s c o n t a i n i n g a
p r i m a r y a r o m a t i c amino g r o u p react w i t h 9 - c h l o r o c r i -
d i n e t o y i e l d a m i n o a c r i d i n e h y d r o c h l o r i d e s . The f o r -
mation of t h e s e d e r i v a t i v e s r e s u l t i n quenching of
fluorescence of the 9-chloracridine reagent solu-
t i o n . M o n i t o r i n g t h e f l u o r e s c e n c e a t a c t i v a t i o n and
e m i s s i o n w a v e l e n g t h s o f 385 and 4 2 0 nm r e s p e c t i v e l y
e n a b l e s to a n a l y s e drug i n t h e - 10-6M
r a n g e . An e t h a n o l i c s o l u t i o n o f b e n z o c a i n e i s
a d j u s t e d t o pH4.0 and acridine-tetrahydrofurane
s o l u t i o n e q u i v a l e n t t o a n a p p r o x i m a t e one t o f o u r -
f o l d molar e x c e s s is a d d e d . The m i x t u r e is h e a t e d
a t 600 f o r 1 0 min, c o o l e d and t h e d e c r e a s e i n t h e
f l u o r e s c e n c e i n t e n s i t y of t h e r e a c t i o n m i x t u r e i s
compared t o t h e r e a g e n t b l a n k . The method d i f f e r s
from o t h e r w i d e l y used t e c h n i q u e s i n t h a t i t i n v o l -
v e s quenching of f l u o r e s c e n c e rather than increased
fluorescence i n t e n s i t y as t h e b a s i s f o r t h e f l u o r i -
.
metric m e a s u r e m e n t s ( 7 4 ) Dambrowski and P r a t t ( 7 5 )
i n t r o d u c e d t h e u s e o f 2 , 6 - d i a m i n o p y r i d i n e a s a new
f l u o r e s c e n c e r e a g e n t and showed t h a t t h e s e n s i t i -
v i t y was i n t h e r a n g e of - 10'7M f o r benzo-
caine (75).
Phosphorimetry. Room-temperature phosphoresence
has been r e p o r t e d t o be u s e f u l f o r a n a l y t i c a l d e t e r -
m i n a t i o n o f v a r i o u s d r u g s . B e n z o c a i n e d i d n o t show
r o o m - t e m p e r a t u r e p h o s p h o r e s c e n c e when a d s o r b e d on
s o d i u m a c e t a t e . However i t was f o u n d t h a t b e n z o c a i n e
c o u l d be r e a d i l y h y d r o l y z e d by r e f l u x i n g i n d i l u t e
a c i d . The h y d r o l y s e d s o l u t i o n was s u b s e q u e n t l y
n e u t r a l i s e d w i t h aqueous a l k a l i s . Small a m o u n t s o f
t h i s s o l u t i o n when a p p l i e d to sodium a c e t a t e and
e v a p o r a t e d t o d r y n e s s showed t h e c h a r a c t e r i s t i c
p - a m i n o b e n z o i c a c i d p h o s p h o r e s c e n c e on e x c i t a t i o n
w i t h a UV lamp. Q u a n t i t a t i v e d a t a h a s n o t b e e n
gathered (76).
94 SYED LAIK ALI
Chroma t o g r a ph i c Method s
Sample P r e p a r a t i o n . Aqueous s o l u t i o n s c a n b e
a p p l i e d d i r e c t l y ( 7 7 ) o r t h e s o l u t i o n is f i r s t o f
a l l made a l k a l i n e w i t h NaOH and t h e l o c a l a n e s t h e t i c
t h e n e x t r a c t e d w i t h ether ( 7 8 ) . O i l s o l u t i o n s ,
s u p p o s i t o r i e s or o i n t m e n t a r e d i s s o l v e d f i r s t o f
a l l i n l i g h t p e t r o l e u m and t h e n e x t r a c t e d w i t h 1 N
HC1. The HC1 e x t r a c t is made a l k a l i n e and t h e n reex-
t r a c t e d w i t h c h l o r o f o r m . With some o i n t m e n t s i t i s
more a d v a n t a g e o u s t o d i s s o l v e t h e o i n t m e n t i n
b e n z e n e ( 7 2 ) . T a b l e t s c a n be e x t r a c t e d d i r e c t l y
w i t h m e t h a n o l a f t e r c r u s h i n g ( 7 7 ) . Drug f o r m u l a -
t i o n s a r e d i s p e r s e d i n 1%HC1, f i l t e r e d , f i l t r a t e
made a l k a l i n e w i t h ammonia, s o l u t i o n e x t r a c t e d w i t h
c h l o r o f o r m and t h e n r e e x t r a c t e d w i t h HC1 ( 7 9 ) .
P a p e r Chromatography. B e n z o c a i n e c a n be s e p a r a t e d
o n p a p e r , i m p r e g n a t e d w i t h formamide, u s i n g b e n z e n e
as m o b i l e p h a s e ( 7 7 ) . The s o l v e n t s y s t e m n - b u t a n o l -
a c e t i c a c i d - w a t e r , 4:1:5 ( 8 0 ) is a l s o w i d e l y u s e d .
Better results, p a r t i c u l a r l y f o r t h e s e p a r a t i o n of
decomposition products can be achieved i n s o l v e n t
s y s t e m c o n t a i n i n g n - b u t a n o l - HC1-water, 60:10:75
( 7 9 ) . I n p a p e r c h r o m a t o g r a p h y w i t h fromamide a s
s t a t i o n a r y p h a s e a l l s u b s t a n c e s w i t h a f r e e amino
group f l u o r e s c e i n UV-light a f t e r t h e chromatogram
h a s b e e n d r i e d a t 105OC.
T h i n l a y e r Chromatography. S i l i c a g e l G t h i n l a y e r
p l a t e s p r e p a r e d i n 0 . 1 N NaOH (811, s i l i c a g e l G F
254 p l a t e s ( 2 8 ) and a l u m i n a p l a t e s ( 8 2 ) h a v e b e e n
used f o r b e n z o c a i n e s e p a r a t i o n . The b e h a v i o u r o f
b e n z o c a i n e and i t s f u r t h e r homologues h a s a l s o b e e n
i n v e s t i g a t e d through p a r t i t i o n chromatography using
c e l l u s l o s e powder i m p r e g n a t e d w i t h o l e y l a l c o l h o l
and a q u e o u s b u f f e r s o l u t i o n s a s m o b i l e p h a s e s ( 8 3 ) .
Under t h e s e c o n d i t i o n s a n i n t e r e s t i n g r e l a t i o n s h i p
b e t w e e n t h e pH v a l u e o f t h e m o b i l e p h a s e and t h e
m o b i l i t y was d e r i v e d . Cyclohexane-benzene-diethyl-
amine, 75:15:10 ( 8 1 ) , b e n z e n e - e t h a n o l , 95:5 ( 8 0 )
and t o l u e n e - e t h a n o l , 95:s ( 2 8 ) h a v e b e e n u s e d a s
m o b i l e p h a s e s f o r t h e s e p a r a t i o n of b e n z o c a i n e .
Roeder and c o w o r k e r s ( 8 4 ) h a v e used mixtures o f
d i f f e r e n t homogeneous a z e o t r o p i c s o l v e n t s f o r t h e
t h i n - l a y e r chromatographic s e p a r a t i o n of benzocaine
from o t h e r l o c a l a n e s t h e t i c s . Chloroform-methanol,
BENZOCAINE 95
80 : 1 0 and e t h a n o l a s m o b i l e p h a s e s and s i l i c a g e l
t h i n l a y e r p l a t e s t r e a t e d w i t h 0.1 N NaOH h a v e b e e n
used f o r t h e s e p a r a t i o n o f b e n z o c a i n e f r o m o t h e r
l o c a l a n e s t h e t i c s ( 4 5 ) . Fuwa ( 8 8 ) r e p o r t e d t h e u s e
o f t h e s i l i c a g e l TLC p l a t e s and b e n z e n e - a c e t o n e -
ammonia, 80:20:T a s m o b i l e p h a s e f o r TLC s e p a r a -
t i o n . A TLC s y s t e m t h a t s e p a r a t e s b e n z o c a i n e f r o m
its h y d r o l y s i s product p-aminobenzoic acid h a s been
r e p o r t e d ( 8 7 ) . S i l i c a g e l TLC p l a t e s and a s o l v e n t
s y s t e m o f b e n z e n e - d i o x a n e - a c e t i c a c i d , 90:75:8
were a p p l i e d ( 8 7 ) .
D e t e c t i o n c a n b e made by q u e n c h i n g i n s h o r t wave-
l e n g t h UV l i g h t , a f t e r s p r a y i n g w i t h E h r l i c h ' s
r e a g e n t which g i v e s y e l l o w s p o t s ( 7 7 ) , d i a z o t i -
s a t i o n f o l l o w e d by c o u p l i n g w i t h & - n a p h t o l ( 8 0 )
and s p r a y i n g w i t h i o d i n e - p o t a s s i u m i o d i d e s o l u -
tion (82).
Q u a n t i t a t i v e d e n s i t o m e t r i c d e t e r m i n a t i o n of benzo-
c a i n e a t 285 nm a f t e r s e p a r a t i o n on t h i n l a y e r
p a l t e s h a s been r e p o r t e d ( 2 8 ) . Benzocaine h a s a l s o
b e e n d e t e r m i n e d a f t e r TLC s e p a r a t i o n by r e a c t i n g i t
w i t h d a n s y l c h l o r i d e r e a g e n t and t h e s u b s e q u e n t
d e t e r m i n a t i o n of f l u o r e s c e n c e i n t e n s i t y of a d d u c t s
t h r o u g h T L C - F l u o r i m e t r y ( 8 8 ) . Microgram q u a n t i t i e s
o f b e n z o c a i n e were d e t e r m i n e d t h r o u g h t h i s method.
R f - v a l u e s o f f l u o r e s c i n g a d d u c t s on d i f f e r e n t TLC
p l a t e s a r e r e p o r t e d ( 8 8 ) . TLC s e p a r a t i o n and s p e c -
t r o p h o t o m e t r i c d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f p r o c a i n e and b e n z o -
c a i n e i n v a r i o u s pharmaceutical p r e p a r a t i o n s h a s
a l s o been performed ( 8 9 , 9 0 ) .
High P e r f o r m a n c e L i q u i d C h r o m a t o g r a p h y .
B e n z o c a i n e and a n t i p y r i n e i n e a r d r o p s h a v e b e e n
s e p a r a t e d and d e t e r m i n e d t h r o u g h HPLC on /((-Ban-
d a p a c k C 1 8 column (Waters) u s i n g a m o b i l e p h a s e o f
0 . 0 2 M KH2P04 i n water c o n t a i n i n g 408 m e t h a n o l .
D e t e c t i o n was d o n e a t 254 nm ( 9 1 ) . HPLC h a s a l s o
been a p p l i e d f o r t h e s i m u l t a n e o u s a s s a y of benzo-
c a i n e and i t s h y d r o l y s i s p r o d u c t p - a m i n o b e n z o i c
a c i d . A C 1 8 m i c r o p a r t i c u l a t e column w i t h a m o b i l e
phase of methanol - a c e t i c a c i d - water, 33:4:63
were u s e d a t a m b i e n t t e m p e r a t u r e w i t h a f l o w r a t e
o f 2 ml/min and d e t e c t i o n w a v e l e n g t h 254 nm. The
r e t e n t i o n times f o r p - a m i n o b e n z o i c a c i d and b e n z o -
96 SYED LAIK ALI
9. Drug Me t ab o l i s m and P h a r m a c o k i n e t i c s
An i n s i t u c o r n e a l p e r f u s i o n s y s t e m which e n a b l e s
q u a n t i t a t i o n of c o r n e a l d r u g u p t a k e h a s been u s e d
t o e v a l u a t e t h e u p t a k e o f b e n z o c a i n e i n r a b b i t s . By
determining t h e d e c l i n e i n drug c o n c e n t r a t i o n i n
t h e p e r f u s i o n a p p a r a t u s a s a f u n c t i o n o f time i t
was p o s s i b l e t o measure d r u g c l e a r a n c e from t h e
s y s t e m , t h e r e b y o b t a i n i n g a measure o f c o r n e a l d r u g
u p t a k e . Using t h i s method t h e c l e a r a n c e o f benzo-
c a i n e from t h e s y s t e m by r a b b i t c o r n e a s was exami-
ned. T h e i n s i t u p e r f u s i o n s y s t e m p r o v i d e s r e p r o -
d u c i b l e r e s u l t s and o b v i a t e s many o f t h e p r o b l e m s
associated w i t h isolated i n v i t r o corneal studies.
T h i s method c a n be u t i l i z e d t o s t u d y t h e e f f e c t of
p h y s i c o c h e m i c a l d r u g p r o p e r t i e s on c o r n e a l u p t a k e
a s well a s i n o c u l a r p h a r m a c o k i n e t i c modeling and
dosage form e v a l u a t i o n ( 9 4 ) .
E f f e c t s o f a n e s t h e t i c s l i k e b e n z o c a i n e etc. on
s u l f a t e t r a n s p o r t i n t h e red c e l l have been i n v e s t i -
gated. Experiments suggested t h a t a n e s t h e t i c s a c t
t h r o u g h a g e n e r a l mechanism and t h a t t h e s u l f a t e
t r a n s p o r t i n t h e red b l o o d c e l l i s a good model f o r
s t u d y i n g t h e mechanism of a c t i o n of a n e s t h e t i c s
(95)
Transport of benzocaine a c r o s s chromatophore has
b e e n s t u d i e d . T r a n s p o r t of u n p r o t o n a t e d l o c a l
a n e s t h e t i c , although electrically n e u t r a l , requires
t h e p r e s e n c e o f a membrane p o t e n t i a l ( 9 6 ) . Absorp-
t i o n of 3 H - l a b e l l e d b e n z o c a i n e from o i n t m e n t s
f o l l o w i n g a d m i n i s t r a t i o n i n r a t s h a s been s t u d i e d .
T o t a l r a d i o a c t i v i t y i n t h e blood of r a t s f o r f i v e
h o u r s f o l l o w i n g r e c t a l a d m i n i s t r a t i o n of 3H-ben-
z o c a i n e i n o l e a g e n o u s , a b s o r p t i o n e m u l s i o n (water
i n o i l and o i l - i n - w a t e r ) a n d water s o l u b l e o i n t m e n t
v e h i c l e s was measured. The release was g r e a t e s t
from t h e w a t e r - s o l u b l e v e h i c l e and f o l l o w e d t h e
same r e l a t i v e o r d e r a s i n a n i n v i t r o e x p e r i m e n t
( F i g . 1 7 ) ( 9 7 ) . No i n t a c t b e n z o c a i n e was found i n
t h e blood using radiochromatography. I n v i t r o hydro-
l y s i s o f b e n z o c a i n e by r a t b l o o d d i d n o t o c c u r . T h e
r a t e o f a p p e a r a n c e and amount of d r u g i n t h e blood
a f t e r r e c t a l a p p l i c a t i o n s h o u l d be a u s e f u l measure
of t h e r a t e and amount of d r u g t r a n s f e r from a
dosage form t o t h e s e n s o r y nerve e n d i n g s i n t h e
r e c t a l mucosa ( 9 7 ) . The a b s o r p t i o n of d e t e c t a b l e
SYED LAIK ALI
98
1 a 3 4 6
HOURS
amounts of b e n z o c a i n e a f t e r a p p l i c a t i o n t o abroded
abdominal s k i n i n dogs and t h e a b i l i t y o f v a r i o u s
b e n z o c a i n e c o n t a i n i n g p r e p a r a t i o n s t o obtuned t h e
i t c h and b u r n i n g e l e c t r i c a l s t i m u l a t i o n i n humans
h a v e been r e p o r t e d ( 9 8 , 9 9 ) . A b s o r p t i o n of some
l o c a l a n e s t h e t i c s h a s been r e p o r t e d t o b e d e p e n d e n t
on t h e mucous s u r f a c e ( 9 8 ) . B e n z o c a i n e is c l e a r l y
degraded i n v i v o , however t h e d e g r a d a t i o n occurs
p r o b a b l y i n t h e l i v e r ( 1 0 0 ) . Rectal a d m i n i s t r a t i o n
of t h e same c o n c e n t r a t i o n of 3H-benzocaine i n t h e
same v e h i c l e t o male and f e m a l e r a t s r e s u l t s i n a
lower blood r a d i o a c t i v i t y v e r s u s time c u r v e s f o r
t h e male r a t s (51). No m e t a b o l i c s t u d i e s o f benzo-
c a i n e have been r e p o r t e d . M e t a b o l i c s t u d i e s of amino
a c i d d e r i v a t i v e s of b e n z o c a i n e r e v e a l e d t h e p o s s i b i -
l i t y of r a p i d h y d r o l y s i s o f t h e d e r i v a t i v e s t o
b e n z o c a i n e by t i s s u e s and plasma h y d r o l y z i n g
enzymes. They a r e c o n s i d e r e d a s p r o d r u g s (101).
C l i n i c a l p h a r m a c o k i n e t i c s of s e v e r a l l o c a l a n e s t h e -
t i c s h a s been examined by T u c k e r ( 1 0 2 ) . Blood con-
c e n t r a t i o n s of l o c a l a n e s t h e t i c s a f t e r p e r i n e u r a l
i n j e c t i o n s a r e n o t c l o s e l y r e l a t e d t o age, weight
or pregnancy b u t may be i n f l u e n c e d by d i s e a s e s
a s s o c i a t e d w i t h haemodynamic c h a n g e s and by o t h e r
d r u g s g i v e n a t o r around t h e time o f r e g i o n a l
b l o c k a d e ( 1 0 2 ) . The a b s o r p t i o n and u r i n a r y excre-
t i o n of b e n z o c a i n e were i n v e s t i g a t e d i n r a t s by t h e
method of mass fragmentography. The i n t a c t benzo-
c a i n e was found s l i g h t l y i n t h e serum a f t e r o r a l
d o s e . p-Aminobenzoic a c i d , h a y d r o l y z e d p r o d u c t of
b e n z o c a i n e r a p i d l y r e a c h e d t o t h e maximum c o n c e n -
t r a t i o n a t 1 0 min, t h e n soon d i s a p p e a r e d from t h e
serum ( 1 0 3 ) .
A c know1edg emen t
The a u t h o r t h a n k s D r . Hausser and D r . H.W. D i b b e r n ,
Hoechst, F r a n k f u r t , F e d e r a l R e p u b l i c o f Germany f o r
p r o v i d i n g some u s e f u l i n f o r m a t i o n .
100 SYED LAIK ALI
References
Ritsert, K., Pharmaz. Ztg., 3 350 (1902).
Kobert-Rostock, Binz-Bonn and
Filehne-Breslau, Berliner Klinische
Wochenschrift, 17 373 (1902).
3) Ritsert, K. DRPT47790, 150070 (1902).
4) Ammelburg, A., Berichte der Deutschen
Pharmazeutischen Gesellschaft, 14 20 (1904)
In organic syntesis coll. v o l . 1, P 235
.
5)
(1932) New York.
Salkowski, H. , Berichte 28 (1921).
Limpricht, H., Ann. 303 278 (1898).
Auterhoff, H., Lehrbuch der Pharmazeu-
tischen Chemie 8. Auflage, Page 334,
W issenschaftl iche Verlag sgesellschaft
Stu t tga r t (1976)
9) Ritsert, E., in Dr. P. Friedlander's
Fortschritte der Teerfarbenfabrikation, 7.
Tell P. 630; 8. Tell (1905-1907) P. 989
(1902-1904).
United States Pharmacopeia XX Rockville,
Md. 2088, USA (1980).
Europaisches Arzneibuch, Kommentar, Page
570, Wissenschaftliche Verlagsgesellschaft,
S tu t tg a r t ( 19 76)
Ibid
Schulmann, S.G., L.S. Rosenberg and R.J.
Sturgeon, J. pharm. Sci, 67 334 (1978).
Dibbern, H.W., UV and IR spectra of some
important drugs, Editio Contor, Aulendorf
(1.979)
Nielsen, T.K. and L. Borka, Acta Pharm.
Suec., 2 503 (1972)
Borka, L. and M. Kuhnert-Brandstatter,
Arch. Pharm., 307 377 (1974)
Lee, K.C. and J.A. Hersey, Acta Pharm.
suec., 4 213 (1977)
6sterreTchisches Arzneibuch, 9. Ausgabe,
Page 293, Wien (1960).
Arzneibuch der Deutschen Demokratischen
Republik, 2. Ausgabe, Akademie Verlag
Berlin (1975)
Beilsteins Handbuch der organischen Chemie
HXIV syst. No. 1905, P. 422 (1931).
BENZOCAINE 101
E b e l , S., Handbuch d e r A r z n e i m i t t e l -
A n a l y t i k . P a g e 269, V e r l a g Chemie,
Weinheim-New Y o r k 1 9 7 7 .
Fuwa, T., To K i d a a n d H. T a n a k d ,
J a k u z a i g a k u , 24 1 2 3 ( 1 9 6 4 1 , C.A. 61 1 5 9 3 4 f
(1964).
Wan S.H., B.U. Lehmann a n d S. R i e g e l m a n ,
J. Pharm. S c i . , 3 1 2 8 8 ( 1 9 7 2 ) .
Messerschmidt, W., Deutsche Apotheker
Z e i t u n g , 111 597 ( 1 9 7 1 ) .
Kvach, O.S., Farm. Z H ( K i e v ) , 28 22 ( 1 9 7 9 ) .
Haque, S., B a n g l a d e s c h Pharm. J. 3 21
(1978) .
S c i . , 66 897 ( 1 9 7 7 ) .
G u p t a , V.D. a n d S. S a c h a n a n d i n i , J. Pharm.
E b e l , S , Handbuch d e r A r z n e i m i t t e l -
A n a l y t i k , P a g e 270, V e r l a g Chemie,
Weinheim-New Y o r k 1 9 7 7 .
93) K o e h l e r , H.M. a n d J.J. H e f f e r r e n , J.
,
Pharm. S c i . 5? 7 4 5 ( 1 9 6 4 ) .
9 3 a ) S c h m i t z - M a s s e , M.O., M. H e r p o l - B o r r e m a n s
and F. P a r m e n t i e r , I n t e r n a t i o n a l J o u r n a l
of Cosmetic S c i a n c e 1 1 0 1 ( 1 9 7 9 ) .
F r a n c o e u r , M. a n d T.P. P d t t o n , I n t e r n a t i o -
n a l J o u r n a l of P h a r m a c e u t i c s 2 337 ( 1 9 7 9 ) .
M a k r i y a n n i s , A. a n d S.W. F e s i k , J.
Neurosci. R e s . , 3 25 ( 1 9 8 0 ) .
Packham, N.K. a n d J . R . J a c k s o n , Biochem.
-
B i o p h y s . Acta 546 1 4 2 ( 1 9 7 9 ) .
A y r e s , J.W., D. L o r s k u l s i n t a n d A. L o c k ,
J. Pharm. S c i . , 64 ( 1 9 7 5 ) 1 9 5 8 .
C a m p b e l l , D. a n d J. A d r i a n i , J. A m e r . Med.
A s s . , 168 8 7 3 ( 1 9 5 8 ) .
A d r i a n i , J. and H. D a l i l i , A n e s t h . A n a l g .
-50 8 3 6 ( 1 9 7 1 ) .
Kaiser, S.C., E.J. K e l v i n g t o n , R. Kunig
and M.M. R a n d o l p h , J. P h a r m a c o l . E x p e r .
T h e r . 164 ( 1 9 6 8 ) 396.
101) Oykowska, S., K. Misterek, H. K l i m e c k a a n d
J. P a c h e c k a , P o l . J. P h a r m a c o l . Pharm., 33
( 1 9 8 1 ) 99.
1 0 2 ) T u c k e r , G.T. a n d L.F. Matter, C l i n i c a l
P h a r m a c o k i n e t i c s , 4 ( 1 9 7 9 ) 241.
1 0 3 ) Yoshizawa, H. e t a l l P h a r m a c o m e t r i c s , 16
1087 (1978).
DIBUCAINE AND DIBUCAINE
HYDROCHLORIDE
Gandharva R . Padmanabhan
1. Description 106
1.1 Name, Formula, Molecular Weight 106
1.2 Appearance, Color, Odor 106
1.3 Therapeutic Category 106
2. Physical and Chemical Properties 106
2.1 Infrared Absorption Spectra 106
2.2 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectra (NMR) 110
2.3 Ultraviolet Absorption Spectra 110
2.4 Mass Spectra 114
2.5 Fluorescence Spectrum 117
2.6 Melting Range 118
2.7 Differential Scanning Calorimetry (DSC) 118
2.8 ThermogravimetricAnalysis (TGA) 118
2.9 Solubility 118
2.10 X-Ray Diffraction 120
2.1 1 Polymorphism 120
2.12 Partition Coefficient 120
2.13 Dissociation Constant 120
3. Synthesis 122
4. Stability-Degradation 122
5. Drug Metabolism and Pharmacokinetics 122
6. Toxicity 125
7. Methods of Analysis 125
7.1 Identification 125
7.2 Elemental Analysis 125
7.3 Nonaqueous Titration 126
7.4 Phase Solubility Analysis 126
7.5 Thin-layer Chromatography 126
7.6 High-PerformanceThin-layer Chromatography 129
7.7 High-pressure Liquid Chromatography 129
7.8 Gas Chromatography 130
7.9 Gas Chromatography-MassSpectrometry 130
7.10 Paper Chromatography 132
7.11 Polarography 132
7.12 Spectrophotometry 132
8. Miscellaneous 133
8.1 Dibucaine Number 133
References 133
ANALYTICAL PROFILES OF DRUG SUBSTANCES 105 Copyrightby the American Pharmaceutical Assuciatmn.
ISBN 0-12-260812-7
VOLUME 12
106 GANDHARVA R. PADMANABHAN
1. Description
1.1 Name, Formula, Molecular Weight
Dibucaine is 2-butoxy-N-[2-(diethylamino)-
ethyl]-4-quinolinecarboxamide
&'- 0CH2CH2CH2CH3
CONHCH~CH~N(C~HC,)
2
J
/
,J OCH2CH2CH2CH3
\ #
HC1
TABLE I
I R Spectrum of Dibucaine
-1
Wavenumber, c m Assignment
3300 -NH
0
II
1665 -NH-C -
1605
1 550 Amide I1
1458)
Nujol
1378
1250 Aromatic e t h e r
7 80 0 - D i s u b s t i t u t e d phenyl
TABLE 2
I R Spectrum of Dibucaine HC1
-1
Wavenumber, c m Assignment
3205 -NH
2620
2500 Salt
H O
1670
I II
-N-C-
1605
1555 Amide I1
1458) Nuj 01
1378
1254 Aromatic e t h e r
765 0 - D i s u b s t i t u t e d phenyl
F i g u r e 1. I n f r a r e d Absorption Spectrum Dibucaine
Figure 2. I n f r a r e d Absorption Spectrum of Dibucaine Hydrochloride
110 GANDHARVA R. PADMANABHAN
TABLE 3
Chemical
No. of
Shift Multiplicity Assignment
Protons
6 (ppm)
8.7-9.1 Broad 1
0
-C-NH-CH 2 -
-
7.2-8.3 Multiplet 5 Aromatic E's
4.3-4.7 Triplet 2 -0-CE2-CH2-
9
3.6-4.3 Broad 2 -C-NH-CE2-CH2
, CE2
2.8-3.6 Multiplet 6 -CE2-N,
CE2-
/ cH2-c!!3
0.8-2.3 M u l t i p l et 13 N and
'CHz-CB3
13
The C- NMR spectra of d i b u c a i n e and d i b u c a i n e
h y d r o c h l o r i d e doterairled i n d e u t e r a t e d chloro-
form as s o l v e n t a r e shown i n F i g u r e s 5 and 6 .
2.3 U l t r a v i o l e t Absorption S p e c t r a
The UV s p e c t r a of d i b u c a i n e and d i b u c a i n e
hydrochloride (Figure 7 ) i n 1E H C 1 e x h i b i t
maxima and minima as shown i n Table 4 .
DIBUCAINE AND DIBUCAINE HYDROCHLORIDE 111
I
80
I
70
I
60
1
50
I
40
1
30
I
20
,
10
1
0
PPM
f-
I 1 I T I I I I
90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
PPM
I I I I I
175 150 125 100 75 50 25 0
PPM
l.3
Figure 5. C-NMR Spectrum of Dibucaine
I
I
150
1 I
100
PPM
I
50
nw
0
I
10
09
08
07
06
Q)
0
C
0
05
2
0
a
04
03
0 2.
01
0 0- I 1 I I
250 300 350 400
Wavelength, Nanometers
Dibucaine Dibucaine H C 1
'max, nm A ( 1% ,lcm) E A ( 1% ,lcm) E
2.4 Mass S p e c t r a
The low r e s o l u t i o n mass s p e c t r a of d i b u c a i n e
and d i b u c a i n e h y d r o c h l o r i d e o b t a i n e d
u s i n g a s o l i d probe i n s e r t i o n are shown i n
F i g u r e s 8 and 9. The s p e c t r a were run on a
Kratos MS 25 spectrometer i n t e r f a c e d w i t h a d a t a
handling system. Tables 5-6 i l l u s t r a t e t h e
fragments and t h e i r mass/charge r a t i o s .
TABLE 5
Fragmentation P a t t e r n of Dibucaine
DIBUCAINE AND DIBUCAINE HYDROCHLORIDE 115
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0 1,
I 11 dl
L,
350
mfe
Figure 8
Low Resolution Mass Spectrum of Dibucaine
116 GANDHARVA R. PADMANABHAN
90 -
80 -
70-
60 -
50-
40 -
30-
20 -
10-
50
m/e
Figure 9
Low Resolution Mass Spectrum of Dibucaine Hydrochloride
DIBUCAINE AND DIBUCAINE HYDROCHLORIDE 117
TABLE 6
Fragmentation Pattern of Dibucaine Hydrochloride
m/e I Fragment
343
271
215
+
172
144
2.9 Solubility
Approximate s o l u b i l i t i e s i n d i f f e r e n t
s o l v e n i s were determined a f t e r e q u i l i b r a t i n g 10
mg (more, i f n e c e s s a r y , t o o b t a i n a s a t u r a t e d
s o l u t i o n ) of t h e drugs a t room temperature w i t h 1
mL of s o l v e n t .
S o l u b i l i t y , mg/mL
Solvent
Dibucaine Dibucaine H C 1
Water <0.1 >loo0
0.1z HC1 >33l >loo0
0.1E NaOH <0.1 KO.1
Methanol >loo0 >loo0
Ethanol, Absolute >loo0 >loo0
95% Ethanol >loo0 >loo0
Chloroform >loo0 >loo0
Ethyl Acetate 100- 1000 10-33
Ether 100-1000 0.1-1
Petroleum Ether 10-33 <0.1
Acetone 100-1000 100-1000
n-Hexane 10-33 <0.1
.1 g d i s s o l v e s i n 10-30 1
DIBUCAINE AND DIBUCAINE HYDROCHLORIDE 119
2.11 Polymorphism
No polymorphism has been reported for
dibucaine base and dibucaine hydrochloride.
I I I I
5 15 25 35
3* Synthesis
Dibucaine and dibucaine hydrochloride are prepared
by the following sequence of reactions (Figure 14)
starting with isatin (3). Isatin (I) is reacted with
malonic acid in the presence of an acid to form carbo-
styrilic acid (11). The acid is then treated with
phosphorous oxychloride to yield 2-chlorocinchoninic
acid chloride (111) in solution. The solution is then
reacted with diethylaminoethylamine to form 2-chloro-
N(2-diethylaminoethyl) cinchoninamide (IV) in solution.
The cinchoninamide solution is then treated with
sodium n-butylate to form dibucaine base(V). The base
is purified and then converted to the hydrochloride
salt (VI) by reacting with hydrogen chloride.
4. Stability-Degradation
Dibucaine hydrochloride (I) (Figure 1 5 ) , when
boiled for 4 hours in 2N hydrochloric acid, resulted
in complete hydrolysis to 2-hydroxyquinoline-4-carboxy-
lic acid diethylaminoethylamide (11) and 2-hydroxy-
quinoline-4-carboxylic acid (III)(4). Hydrolysis of
dibucaine hydrochloride, with pH = 5.45 and at a
temperature of 134°C for 40 hours resulted in the
formation of Compound I1 only Autoclaving of a solution
of dibucaine hydrochloride in a mixture of 10% sodium
hydroxide and ethanol at 120°C for 2 hours resulted in
the formation of 2-butoxyquinoline-4-carboxylic acid
(IV). Under the influence of an oxidizing agent such
as m-chloroperbenzoic acid, dibucaine can be oxidized
to its N-oxide analog (V). The N-oxide can further
react with reagents such as ferrous sulfate to yield
the desethyl analog (VI) of dibucaine and dibucaine
(5).
I I
5 1; 2; 35
IV 111
NaOCgHg
124 GANDHARVA R. PADMANABHAN
\ II
0
0
t
IV
VI
Figure 15
Chemistry of Dibucaine and Dibucaine Hydrochloride
DIBUCAINE AND DIBUCAINE HYDROCHLORIDE 125
of t h e l a s t dose. D i s p o s i t i o n of d i b u c a i n e f o l l o w i n g
m u l t i p l e r e c t a l a d m i n i s t r a t i o n of 0.1% s u p p o s i t o r i e s
i s comparable t o ointment a d m i n i s t e r e d s i m i l a r l y
(6-7).
6. Toxicity
The a c u t e i n t r a p e r i t o n e a l LD50 v a l u e s of d i b u c a i n e
h y d r o c h l o r i d e i n male mice and female mice observed
over a p e r i o d of 15 days were found t o b e r e s p e c t i v e l y
7 1 mg/kg and 74 mg/kg. The a c u t e o r a l LD50 v a l u e s of
d i b u c a i n e h y d r o c h l o r i d e i n m a l e rats and female r a t s
observed o v e r a p e r i o d of 1 5 days w e r e found t o be
r e s p e c t i v e l y 371 mgfkg and 395 mg/kg (8).
7. Methods of A n a l y s i s
7.1 I d e n t i f i c a t i o n
Two i d e n t i f i c a t i o n tests are g i v e n i n t h e
USP XX f o r d i b u c a i n e , one a n i n f r a r e d a b s o r p t i o n
t e s t and t h e o t h e r a n u l t r a v i o l e t a b s o r p t i o n
t e s t . For d i b u c a i n e h y d r o c h l o r i d e , f o u r i d e n t i -
f i c a t i o n tests are g i v e n i n USP XX. The t e s t s
i n c l u d e d are i n f r a r e d a b s o r p t i o n , u l t r a v i o l e t
a b s o r p t i o n , m e l t i n g p o i n t of i s o l a t e d f r e e b a s e
and a t e s t f o r c h l o r i d e .
Methods t o i d e n t i f y and d i f f e r e n t i a t e
d i b u c a i n e from n i n e o t h e r l o c a l a n e s t h e t i c s have
been r e p o r t e d i n t h e l i t e r a t u r e ( 9 ) . The methods
are based o r t h e m e l t i n g , i n f r a r e d and photomicro-
g r a p h i c p r o p e r t i e s of t h e d e r i v a t i v e s o b t a i n e d
with styphnic acid, p i c r i c acid, c h l o r o p l a t i n i c
a c i d , p i c r o l o n i c a c i d , ammonium r e i n e c k a t e and
methyl i o d i d e .
7.2 Elemental A n a l y s i s
The f o l l o w i n g e l e m e n t a l compositions were
o b t a i n e d f o r d i b u c a i n e and d i b u c a i n e h y d r o c h l o r i d e
when 2 mg samples were employed f o r a n a l y s i s
w i t h a Perkin-Elmer Model 240 CHN Analyzer.
DIBUCAINE
Element Theory, % Found, %
Carbon 69.94 69.67
Hydrogen 8.51 8.60
Nitrogen 12.23 12.07
126 GANDHARVA R. PADMANABHAN
DIBUCAINE HYDROCHLORIDE
Element Theory, % Found, %
Carbon 63.22 62.99
Hydrogen 7.96 8.19
Nitrogen 11.06 10.88
System I Continued
Detection
Systems: 1. Spray with 0.5% potassium
dichromate in 20% sulfuric acid
followed by heating at 140°C
for 10 minutes and viewing
under shortwave UV
2. Irradiate with high intensity
UV for 10 minutes followed by
visualization under long wave UV
System 11 (11)
Column : 25 cm x 4.6 mm Lichrosorb RP 8
column
Detection: UV 254 nm
Temperature: 25 C
Flow Rate: 2 mIJminute
Mobile Phase: A. Methanol-Water-Diethylamine
(90:10:0.02)
B. Methanol-Water-Diethylamine
(80:20:0.02)
C. Methanol-Water-Diethylamine
(75: 25:0.02)
130 GANDHARVA R. PADMANABHAN
System I1 Continued
Approximate
Retention A = 4.5 minutes
Time of B = 7.4 minutes
Dibucaine C = 10.9 minutes
Method I Continued
Temperature: I n j e c t o r - 260°C; Column - 250°C:
GC-MS I n t e r f a c e -250°C
Carrier: Helium
MS E I Source: 37 ev
Internal
Standard: Nonadeuterated d i b u c a i n e
Method I1 (15)
Column : 2.5 f t x 2 mm i . d . s i l a n i z e d g l a s s
column w i t h 1 . 5 % OV-1 on Chromasorb
W-HP 80/100 mesh
Detection: GC-MS (CI) s e l e c t e d i o n m o n i t o r i n g
a t m / e = 344 and m / e = 353
Temperature: Column - 215°C; I n j e c t o r - 260°C;
GC-MS I n t e r f a c e - 250°C
Carrier: Methane
MS C I Source: 55-85 ev
C I Reagent
Gas: Methane
Internal
Standard : Nonadeuterated d i b u c a i n e
Method I V (17)
Column : 2 m x 2 mm g l a s s column packed
w i t h 3% OV-17 on 80-100 mesh Gas-
Chrorn Q
Detection : GC-MS s e l e c t e d i o n monitoring a t
m / e = 326 and a t m / e = 335 and 336
132 GANDHARVA R. PADMANABHAN
Method IV Continued
Temperature: Column: Programmed at G°C/minute
from 260-300°C; Injector - 300°C;
Ion Source - 300°C
Carrier: Not indicated; 30 mL/minute
MS-EI Source: 75 ev; ionizing current - 300 PA
Internal
Standard : Deuterium-labeled dibucaine (Dg
and Dlo)
7.10 Paper Chromatography
Stationary
Phase: Whatman #1 paper impregnated with
a 1:l solution of acetone and
.
formamide Formamide was adjusted
to pH 5.6 with benzoic acid before
mixing. Remove the excess of the
impregnated solution by blotting
between dry filter papers
Mobile Phase: 2% pyridine in 1:l benzene-
chloroform
Detection: Dragendorff spray reagent
Sample
Solution: Spot 10 pL of 1% dibucaine
hydrochloride in 1:l methanol-
chloroform (18)
R of
f
Dibucaine HC1: -0.75
7.11 Polarography
Polarography has been employed for the
analysis of dibucaine in soLutions and for the
identification of dibucaine (19-20). Polarography
was carried out using a borate-biphosphate buffer
with pH of 5 to 7.5 and measuring the reduction
current at -0.6 V vs calomel electrode. The method
was linear between 5 and 150 mg/100 mL.
7.12 Spectrophotometry
Dibucaine and dibucaine hydrochloride in
formulations can be analyzed by spectrophotometry
(21) by taking advantage of the maxima at 247 nm
and 320 nm in acidic solutions. The technique
when preceded by acid-ether and base-ether
extraction steps is selective for all products
discussed under Section 4 , Stability-Degradation,
except for compound VI.
DIBUCAINE AND DIBUCAINE HYDROCHLORIDE 133
8. Miscellaneous
8.1 Dibucaine Number
When succinylcholine, which is a neuromuscular
agent, was introduced for anesthetic procedures,
it was observed that certain individuals failed to
recover from the paralytic effects and this poor
recovery was attributed to the low activity of
the enzyme cholinesterase in plasma. The identi-
fication of the atypical enzyme activity has been
carried out by the selective inhibition of the
plasma esterase by dibucaine with benzoylcholine
as substrate. A quantitative measure of this
selective inhibition, expressed as a percent of
inhibition, is called the dibucaine number (22-25).
9. References
1. Martucci, J . D. and Schulman, S. G., Anal. Chim.
Acta, 77, 317 (1975)
2. Hrdy, 0. and Slouf, A., Cs. Pharm., 1,7 1 ( 1 9 5 2 ) ;
and Die Pharmaczie, 8, 1 5 9 ( 1 9 5 3 )
3. CIBA-GEIGY, Personal Communication
4 . Morch, J . , Dansk. Tidsskr. Farm., 27, 1 7 5 (1953)
5. Senn, H. and Kathriner, A., CIBA-GEIGY, Personal
Communication
6 . Alkalay, D., Carlsen, S., Khemani, L., Wagner
Jr., W. E . , and Le Sher, A., CIBA-GEIGY, Personal
Communication
7. Bartlett, M. F. and Egger, H., CIBA-GEIGY, Personal
Communication
8. Thomann, P. and Pericin, C., CIBA-GEIGY, Personal
Communication
9 . Rich, N. W. and Chatten, L. G., J . Pharm. Sci.,
-
5 4 , 9 9 5 (1965)
10. Grady, L. T., Pharmacopeial Formum, United States
Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., p. 1 4 3 6 , Sept.-
Oct. 1 9 8 1
11 Grady, L. T., USP-NF Reference Standards Committee,
United States Pharmacopeia, Letter 9 9 , p. 432-
438, dated February 2 5 , 1 9 8 1
1 2 . Giibitz, G. and Wintersteiger, R., Sci. Pharm.,
4 6 , 275 (1978) (German)
-
13. Liu, R., CIBA-GEIGY, Personal Communication
1 4 . Takeoka, T., Kojima, T. and Kobayashi, H., Nippon
Hoigaku Zasshi, s, 20 (1979) (Japan)
15. Alkalay, D., Carlsen, S. and Wagner, W. E., Anal.
Letters, 14(B20), 1 7 4 5 (1981)
1 6 . Kageura, M., Totoki, K. and Nagata, T., Nippon
Hoigaku Zasshi, 2, 188 ( 1 9 7 8 ) (Jap. J . Legal
Med.) (English)
134 GANDHARVA R. PADMANABHAN
10. Acknowledgement
The author expresses appreciation to Ingrid
Becue, Richard Brown, James B. Smith and Jane Johnson
f o r help in preparation of this manuscript.
ESTRONE
Douglas Both
I . Introduction 136
1.1 History 136
1.2 Structure, Nomenclature, and Molecular Weight 137
1.3 Biosynthesis and Metabolism 137
1.4 Synthesis and Commercial Production 142
2. Physical Properties 144
2.1 Crystal Structure 144
2.2 Powder X-Ray Diffraction 145
2.3 Melting Point 145
2.4 Thermal Analysis 145
2.5 Magnetic Susceptibility 149
3. Spectrometry 149
3.1 Proton Nuclear Magnetic Resonance 149
3.2 Carbon-I3 NMR Spectra 149
3.3 Mass Spectrometry 152
3.4 Infrared Spectrometry 154
3.5 Ultraviolet and Visible Spectrophotometry 156
3.6 Optical Rotatory Dispersion and Specific Rotation 156
3.7 Fluorescence and Phosphorescence 157
4. Solution Properties 158
4.1 Solubility 158
4.2 Partition Coefficients 158
4.3 Molecular Volume 158
4.4 Heat of Formation and Combustion 160
4.5 Acid Ionization Constant 160
4.6 Stability 160
5. Chromatographic and Other Separation-based Analysis 161
5.1 Column Chromatography 161
5.2 Thin Layer Chromatography 163
5.3 High-Performance Liquid Chromatography 165
5.4 Gas-Liquid Chromatography 167
5.5 Gas Chromatography-Mass Spectrometry 169
6. Radioassay 170
7. Colorimetric Analysis 172
8. Titrimetric Analysis 174
References 174
ANALYTICAL PROFILES OF DRUG SUBSTANCES 135 Copyrightby the American Pharmaceutical Association.
VOLUME 12 ISBN 0-12-260812-7
136 DOUGLAS BOTH
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 HISTORY
In Vitro s t u d i e ~ l ~
-- have
’ ~ ~shown that estrone arises
from acetate. After several Nicotinamide-Adenine
Dinucleotide Phosphate (NADPH) dependent condensation
reactions, acetate forms squalene, which subsequently
undergoes elimination and cyclization to yield cholesterol.
Cleavage of the side chain of cholesterol and several
rearrangements yield pregnenolone. Oxidation and
isomerization produce progesterone which leads to
4-androstene-3, 17-dione and finally to estrone. An
overview of the pathway can be seen in figure 3 .
ESTRONE
F i g u r e 1. The S t r u c t u r e of E s t r o n e
F i g u r e 2. Conformation Diagram o f E s t r o n e .
(Redrawn from R e f e r e n c e 82.)
ESTRONE 139
-
Flgure 4 Summery of the metabollrm of emone.
(Adapted from reference 18, 10.)
142 DOUGLAS BOTH
REFERENCE METHOD
50 From ethyl-l-carbethoxy-2-oxo-l-
cyclohexaneacetate
51 From methyl-l-keto-2-methyl-7-
methoxy-1,2,3,4,4A,9,10A-octahy-
dro-2-phenanthrenecarboxylate
52 From 1,4-androstandiene-l9-01-3,20-
dione-19-benzoate
54 By irradiation of 3,3,17,17-bis
(ethylenedioxy)-19-hydroxy-5-androstene
55 From 4-pregnene-17aYl9,21-trio~-3,
20-dione-19,21-diacetate
56 From androsta-1,4-diene-3,17-dione-17-
ethylene acetal
59 By asymmetric conversion of
2-methyl-2-carbethoxyethyl cyclopentane-
1 ,3-dione
62 An expeditious synthesis
63 From 5-androstene-3f3,19-diol-l7-one by
microbiological action of mycobacterium
phlei strain w
144 DOUGLAS BOTH
64 By oxidation of 19-nor-1(10),5-androstadiene
36-01-17-one
65 By steroselective intramolecular
cycloadditon of olefinic-o-quinodmethane
69 By microbiological conversion of
19-hydroxy-androst-4-ene-3,17-dione
72 From 2B-hydroxy-3,17-dioxoandrost-
4-ene-19-al
74 By microbiologica~dehydrogenation of
3-keto-4-steroids
75 From l-hydroxy-4-androstene-3,17-dione by
fermentation with Penicillium Sp (ATCC
12,556)
76 From andro-1,4-diene-3,17-dione by
pyrolyzing with hot kerosine.
",
-
ORTHORHOMBIC FORM
Evaporation from
Mode of Crystallinzation Sublimation Acetone or Methanol Sublimation
State Stable Metastable Metastable
Crystal form Or thorhombic Orthorhombic Monoclinic
+ 0.005 A
a - 12.188 10.043 9.271
0
+ 0.005 A
b - 16.301 18.424 22.285
0
c -
+ 0.005 A 7.463 7.787 7.610
+ 0.2"
a - 90 90 90
B 5 0.2" 90 90 111.45
y 0.2" 90 90 90
Fig. 6. Powder X-Ray Diffraction Spectrum of Estrone.
ESTRONE 149
3.0 SPECTROMETRY
TABLE 3
CARBON-13 RESONANCE ASSIGNMENTS
CARBON PPM DOWNFIELD FROM TMS
1 125.5
2 112.5
3 154.7
4 114.8
5 136.8
6 37.9
7 26.0
8 28.9
9 43.3
10 129.7
11 25.4
12 31.1
13 47.2
14 49.7
15 20.9
16 35.2
17 219.4
18 13.3
3.3 MASS SPECTROMETRY
Figure 9 gives the low-resolylion mass spectrum of the
U.S.P. reference standard estrone .
The high-resolution
spectrum is given in Table 4. The molecular ion was found
at m/z 270.1585 while the anticipated molecular ion is m/z
270.1620. The fragmentation seen in Table 4 appears to be
consistant with the structure and mass spectrum of estrone.
TABLE 4
HIGH RESOLUTION MASS SPECTRUM
TABLE 5
IR SPECTRAL INTERPRETATION
FREQUENCY (an-') Assignment
1285-1250 -
A dpublet straddling 1275
cm - OH bonding and C-0
stretching indicative of aromatic
OH
4.1 SOLUBILITY
TABLE 6
SOLUBILITY OF ESTRONE (BY G.L.C.)
TABLE 7
PARTITON COEFFICIENTS
Partition
Solvent System Coefficient(K)
4.6 STABILITY
Estrone in most cases is a relatively stable compound.
A 0.1% wlw solution of estrone in chloroform was shown to
be stable for approximate1 3 years by TLC, using ten
different solvent s sternslg7. Estrone dissolved in sesame
oil and in showed little change in
physiological activity after six months of storage at room
temperature.
TABLE 8
SELECTED COLUMN CHROMATOGRAPHIC PROCEDURES
Reference Description
heptane-chloroform-ethanol-water
mixture.
TABLE 9
TLC SEPARATION METHODS
Reference Description
TABLE 10
SELECTED HPLC METHODS
Reference Description
-
Combined gas chromatography mass spectrometry
(GC-MS) using the technique of selective ion monitoring or
fragmentography has been applied for the detection of
estrogens in the lower picogram range.
TABLE 12
SELECTED COMBINED G.C.- M.S. METHODS
Reference Description
6.0 RADIOASSAY
TABLE 13
SELECTED RADIOASSAY METHODS
Referenre Comment
TABLE 14
SELECTED COLORIMETRIC REACTIONS
9.0 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
10.0 References
36. H. Inhoffen, -
Ber., 74, 1911 (1941)
96. F.J. Brown, Diss. Abstr. Int. B., 41(8), 3030 (1981)
215. H.J. Van der Molen et al., Steroids, 6(2) 195 (1965)
226, M.E. Campos et al., Rev. Clin. Esp., 150 (3-4), 133
(1978)
1. Description 192
I , 1 Nomenclature 192
1.2 Formulas and Molecular Weight 192
1.3 Appearance, Color, Odor 192
2. Physical Properties 192
2.1 Infrared Spectrum 192
2.2 Proton Magnetic Resonance Spectrum (PMR) 194
2.3 Mass Spectrum 196
2.4 Raman Spectrum 198
2.5 Ultraviolet Spectrum (UV) 20 1
2.6 Solubility 20 1
2.7 X-Ray Powder Diffraction 20 1
2.8 Melting Range 203
2.9 Differential Thermal Analysis 203
2.10 Specific Optical Rotation 205
3. Synthesis 205
4. Stability-Degradation 205
5. Method of Analysis 208
5.1 Identification 208
5.2 Elemental Analysis 209
5.3 Chromatographic Analysis 209
5.4 Titrimetry 210
6. Analysis of Pharmaceutical Formulations 21 1
6.1 Spectrophotometric Method 21 1
6.2 High Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC) 21 1
7. Drug Metabolism and Pharmacokinetics 211
8. Determination of Etomidate in Biological Fluids 212
References 213
ANALYTICAL PROFILESOF DRUG SUBSTANCES 191 Copyright hy the American Pharmaccurlcal Associatian.
VOLUME 12 ISBN 0-12-260812-7
192 ZUI L. CHANG AND JOSEPH B. MARTIN
1. Description
1.1 Nomenclature
E t omida t e .
1.2 Formulas and Molecular Weight
CHCH3
I
Etomidate is a f i n e w h i t e powder w i t h no d i s c e r n i b l e
odor.
2. Physical Properties
2.1 I n f r a r e d Spectrum
Table I
Proton
Assignment Chemical S h i f t (ppm) Multiplicity
7.74 Doublet
7.78
7.1-7.4 Mu1t i p l e t
1.83 Doublet
1.27 Triplet
T a b l e I1
77.0392 7 7.0391
78.0467 78.0470
79.0545 7 9.0548
95.0242 95.0246
103.0543 103.0547
104.0621 104.0626
105.0699 105.0704
199.0884 199.0872
244.1218 244.1212
2.6 Solubility
Solvent mg Etomidate/100 m l S o l v e n t
Water 0.0045
0.01 N H C 1 0.30
0.1N-HC~ 2.09
Hexane 1.29
Chloroform Greater t h a n 100
Methanol Greater than 100
Ethanol Greater t h a n 100
I s o p r opanol 90-100
Propylene Glycol Greater t h a n 100
Diethyl Ether 23.8
Ace tone Greater t h a n 100
E t h y l Acetate 90-100
Benzene 90-100
0.5
0A
b
'
z
b
Y)
m
0.3
0.2
0.1
Table I11
*d = I n t e r p l a n a r d i s t a n c e .
**1/11 = R e l a t i v e i n t e n s i t y (based on t h e h i g h e s t
i n t e n s i t y of 1 0 0 ) .
2.8 M e l t i n g Range
2.9 D i f f e r e n t i a l Thermal A n a l v s i s
The o p t i c a l r o t a t i o n s of 1%etomidate i n 12
s o l v e n t s measured w i t h a sodium lamp a t 589 nm
and with a mercury lamp a t 570, 546, 436 and 365
nm are summarized i n Table I V ( 4 ) .
Table I V
3. Synthesis
4. Stability-Degradation
N , N-Dimethyformamide (C2H5)3N
0 ; H - N . - CH?- COOC2H5
CH3 R-(+)
Xylene
II HCOOH
t
0-- 7H
I
-
I
N CH2 COOC2H5
CH, R-(+)
Na O C 2H5 H C O O C 2H.j
H ‘c40
~ ~ H - N - C HI - C O O C ~ H S
1
CH3 o// C \ H R-(+l
FIGURE 8 (Continued)
-N-I CH-
I
COOC~HS
iK.*H
CH3 CH2 0 C
I
H-C-CH3 R-(t)
I
$ -CH3
0
H- R-(t)
Etomidote
208 ZUI L. CHANG AND JOSEPH B. MARTIN
5. Method of A n a l y s i s
5.1 Identification
5.2 Elemental A n a l y s i s
Table V I I
Elemental A n a l y s i s of Etomidate
5.3 Chromatographic A n a l y s i s
A chloroform:methanol:ammonium hydroxide s y s -
t e m (100:100:2) h a s been used t o induce t h e
m i g r a t i o n of t h e compound and shortwave ul-
t r a v i o l e t l i g h t was used t o d e t e c t t h e etomi-
d a t e and d e g r a d a t i o n product. The Rf f o r
e t o m i d a t e was 0.74. The major d e g r a d a t i o n
product, e t o m i d a t e a c i d , i f p r e s e n t has a n Rf
of 0.45.
Column : Micro-Bondapak@/C18 ( o c t y l d e c y l
c h e m i c a l l y bonded t o s i l i c a )
Detector: 254 nm
210 ZUI L. CHANG AND JOSEPH B. MARTIN
Detect i o n : Flame i o n i z a t i o n
Temperature: I n j e c t o r : 290°C
D e t e c t o r : 290°C
Column: I s o t h e r m a l 190°C o r
programmed a t 20°C/min
I n i t i a l Temp.: 50°C
F i n a l Temp: 300°C
5.4 Titrimetrv
6. A n a l y s i s of P h a r m a c e u t i c a l Formulations
6.1 S p e c t r o p h o t o m e t r i c Method
During t h e e x t r a c t i o n , t h e a c i d i c f u n c t i o n a l group
of t h e h y d r o l y s i s product, R-(+) 1-(1-phenylethy1)-
1H-imidazole-5-carboxylic a c i d , i s i o n i z e d by t h e
a d d i t i o n of t h e NaHCOg-solution and t h e r e f o r e re-
mains i n t h e aqueous l a y e r . On t h e o t h e r hand,
e t o m i d a t e i s n o t i o n i z e d and passes i n t o t h e o r -
g a n i c l a y e r , where i t i s measured spectrophoto-
.
m e t r i c a l 1y
L e w i ( 9 ) h a s r e p o r t e d t h a t t h e metabolism of e t o m i d a t e
i n t h e l i v e r i s a c a p a c i t y - l i m i t e d Michaelia Menten pro-
cess.
8. Determination of Etomidate i n B i o l o g i c a l F l u i d s
References
1. W W
tion.
.
a shbur n, Abbot t Lab o r a t o r i e s , P e r s o n a l Commun i c a-
3. S. M u e l l e r , Abbott L a b o r a t o r i e s , P e r s o n a l Communica-
tion.
4. J a n s s e n Pharmaceu t i c a , Pe r s o n a l Communication.
7. J. J. P. Heykants, e t . a l . : D i s t r i b u t i o n , metabolism
and e x c r e t i o n of e t o m i d a t e , a s h o r t - a c t i n g h y p n o t i c
drug, i n t h e rat. Comparative s t u d y of (R)-(+) and
(S)-(-)-etomidate. Arch I n t Pharmacodyn Ther, 216,
113-129, 1975.
9. P. J. L e w i , e t . a l . : I n t r a v e n o u s p h a r m a c o k i n e t i c pro-
f i l e i n r a t s of e t o m i d a t e , a s h o r t - a c t i n g h y p n o t i c
drug. Arch I n t Pharmacodyn, 220, 72-86, 1976.
16. J. J. Ambre, e t . a l . : P h a r m a c o k i n e t i c s of e t o m i d a t e ,
a new i n t r a v e n o u s a n e s t h e t i c . Fed P r o c 3 6 , 997,
1977.
Acknowlednements
1. Description 216
1.1 Nomenclature 216
1.2 Occurrence 216
1.3 Structure 216
1.4 Molecular Weight 217
1.5 Elemental Composition 218
1.6 Appearance, Colour, Odour 218
2. Physical Properties 218
2.1 Infrared Spectrum 218
2.2 Ultraviolet Absorption 220
2.3 Circular Dichroism 22 1
2.4 'H-NMR 222
2.5 'T-NMR 224
2.6 Solubility 226
2.7 Viscosity 226
2.8 Optical Rotation 229
2.9 Molecular Weight 229
2.10 Titratable Groups 230
2.11 Dissociation Constant 232
2.12 Elemmlal Analysis 232
2.13 Crystal Properties 232
3. Production 233
4. Stability 234
4.1 Heparin Sodium 234
4.2 Aqueous Sotutions of Heparin ,Sodium (5000nJ/ml) 236
4.3 Combination of Heparin Sodium with Other Substances 237
5. Metabolism and Pharmacokinetics 238
6. Methods of Analysis 240
6.1 IdentificationTests 240
6.2 Colorimetric Analysis 240
6.3 Fluorimetric Analysis 242
6.4 Infrared Spectroscopy 242
6.5 Titrimetric Methods 242
6.6 Turbidimetric and Nephelometric Analysis 243
6.7 Polarographic Analysis 243
6.8 Electrophoretic Analysis 243
6.9 Chromatographic Methods 250
6.10 Amidolytic Methods 256
6.1 1 Esterolytic Methods 258
6.12 Anticoagulant and Allied Tests 259
References 263
ANALYTICAL PROFILES OF DRUG SUBSTANCES 215 Copyright by the American Pharmaceutical Association
VOLUME I2 ISBN 0-12-260812-7
216 FRIEDRICH NACHTMANN ETAL.
1. Description
H e p a r i n Sodium is the ccmrnercial sodium salt of the in-
stable heparinic acid, a n acidic rmcopolysaccharide. The name
is derived from the f i r s t isolation fran dog l i v e r by W a n
i n 1916 (1).
Besides the ccmrnercial sodium salt of heparin, calcium,
barium, lithium, potassium, amrmnium, zinc and lead salts are
also ham, of which, hawever, only heparin calcium is of can-
n-ercial importance. With organic nitrogen bases, heparin forms
s l i g h t l y soluble salts, which are of technological importance
as intennediate products i n the isolation of heparin.
1.1. Nomenclature
Generic name:
Heparin Sodium [9041-08-11
Brand names:
Lip-Hepinette, Liquemin, Pularin, 'Ihrcmbocid,
Thrantoliquine, Vetren
1.2. Occurrence
Heparin occurs in the body tissues of mmnals and could
be detected in the lung, l i v e r , spleen, heart, mcosa, skin,
plasm and lynph.
H e p a r i n is synthesized while bound to protein i n the gra-
nulae of the mast cells ( 2 ) . According to Jeanloz, heparin is
bound to O-L-serin-protein by mean of galactose and xylose ( 3 ) .
I n vim, the sugar is separated fran protein by means of pro-
tease. The release n-echanism of heparin is not ham.
On an industrial level, heparin is mainly isolated fran
t h e lung and nuccsa of the ox and pig, whereby that cbtained
fran porcine mccsa is of greatest importance.
1.3. Structure
For a long time, it was not possible to elucidate t h e
structure of heparin on account of the different origins and
due t o various acccmpanying substances such as heparan sul-
phate, dermatan sulphate and hyaluronic acid being present.
Heparin is a biopolymr belonging to the class of mco-
polysacdmrides. More than 70 % of the structure of "conventio-
nal" heparins can be accounted f o r by repeating disaccharide
units consisting of 1,4-linked L-idmnic acid and D-glucos-
amine. !The iduronic acid residues are O-sulphated a t position
2, and the glucosamine residues are N-sulphated and O-sulpha-
ted a t position 6 ( 4 ) .
HEPARIN SODIUM 217
a - L -I d A a-D-ClcAm
OSOj
iduronic acid
D-glucuronic acid
-
t o disaccharides.
Rosenberg and Lam suggest that a tetrasaccharide unit, L-
N-acetylated D-glucosamine-6-sulphate 4
N-sulphate D-glucosamine-6-sulphate
my represent the structural basis of heparin's anticoagulant
activity (7) .
As possible tertiary structure of hewin, Tabisch des-
cribes a helix, similar to that of peptides, with a pitch of
21 (8).
2.1. -
Infrared Spectrum
The infrared spectrum of heparin sodium isolated fran
porcine rmcosa w s recorded between 4000 and 600 cm-l using a
E3eckn-m Acculab apparatus. ?he spectrum of a KBr disc of the
product is given in figure 2.1. The d i s c was prepared with 1.5
mg of heparin sodium and 300 mg of potassium branide.
The spectm is i n good accordance with the l i t e r a t u r e
(9-11). Analogous spectra are obtained i n an aqueous solution
(D20). The following frequencies are given for the characte-
ristic bands (12,13)
980 an-'
820 cm
QTI
-1
0.75
a
0
K
m
2
sf
2 0.50
0.25
+15
+ 10
+5
I
2
X
I
I1
L E I 0
-5
-10
- 15
Figure 2.3
CD spectrum of heparinic acid -( 1 , sodium heparinate
(-. - .-) , magnesium heparinate ( ...
.) and calcium heparhate
(----) in salt-free aqueous solution (TN = 26 mequiv/l) ; pub-
lished by V i l l i e r s e t al. (22)
-
Instrument : Jasco J-40 B d i c h r m t e r ; Temperature: 22 23OC
222 FRIEDRICH NACHTMANN E T A .
2.6. Solubility
According to the Merck Index, 5 % of heparin sodium is
mluble in water (29). According to Martindale, The ]Extra
Pharmacopoeia, 1 part of heparir5 sodium dissolves i n 2.5
parts of water (30). Saturated solutions of heparin sodium,
i m l a t e d fran porcine numa, wre prepared in 4 d i f f e r e n t
solvents a t 2OoC. The concentrations of t h e solutions were
determined quantitatively by a coagulation mthod. The re-
s u l t s are given i n table 2.1.
Table 2.1
Solubility of heparin sodium (2OOC)
Acetone
2.7. Viscositv
For polymlecular substances such as heparin sodium,
there is a correlation between m l e c u l a r w i g h t and viscosi-
ty. The interdependence was examined f o r bovine heparin (31).
A graphical representation of the r e s u l t s is given in figure
2.6.
The two large peaks present i n the d i f f e r e n t i a l curve
suggest the p o s s i b i l i t y of two discrete species i n the unfrac-
tionated product. The detectable discontinuities in the inte-
gral d i s t r i b u t i o n curve indicate heterogeneity within a rela-
t i v e l y circwnscr- d i s t r i b u t i o n of molecular weights. The
discontinuities are of the order of a tetra-saccharide.
The viscanetric t i t r a t i o n of heparin with sodium hydro-
xide and calcium hydroxide was examined by V i l l i e r s e t al.
(22). The t i t r a t i o n curves are given in f i g u r e 2.7.
HEPARIN SODIUM 227
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 ' 60
50 50 5
v
X
40 ,40 U
?
30 30 Q
20 20
10 10
0 0
70 90 110 130 150 170 190 210
[TI x103
Figure 2.6
.Integral dispersion curve for heparin sodium iractionated
with alcohol. Abscissa: i n t r i n s i c viscosity, ordinate: m l a -
t i v e e i g h t recovered during fractionation; published by
Lasker (31).
+
For N a , the specific viscosity ( j l s p ) rises slightly as E
increases fran 0 to 0.6, i.e., when the strongly acidic groups
are neutralised. A t B -0.6 the carboxylic groups start to be
ionised. The new electric charges produce a further extension
of the already partially extended m a c m l e c u l e s . Beyond 5 = 1,
the specific viscosity decreases because of the salt effect of
the excess of alkaline reagent. me ca2+ viscmetric curve is
canpletely different. The specific viscosity decreases Mi-
ately as a increases fran 0. This trend indicates a strong
interaction that 61lows m c r m l e c u l e s to contract.
228 FRIEDRICH NACHTMANN ETAL.
F
w
Figure 2.7
V i s c a n e t r i c t i t r a t i o n curve of heparinic acid (TN 5 . 2 mequiv/
1) neutralised with sodium hydroxide (-.-.-#--- ) and calcium
hydroxide (---- ) a t 25OC i n salt-free w a t e r solution; pub-
lished by V i l l i e r s e t al. ( 2 2 ) .
Investigations rtFLde by Chung and Ellerton proved that the
viscosity of heparin salts is dependent on the size and &arge
of the ca ion 1 9 ) . ?hereby the following order was found:
5; 1+
Na+<K+<Mg<Sr <E3a2+<Ca2+. The viscosity of heparin is also
.
lowxed by periodate oxidation (19) The f l e x i b i l i t y of hepa-
r i n is increased by cleaving the vicinal hydmxyl groups.
Furthermore, a t constant ionic strength, the viscosity of
heparin in solution is dependent on the pH value. The viscosi-
t y increases between pH 2 and 5. This rise is due to the in-
crease in hydrodynamic wlum of the mlecule (19). The type
of solvent has a large influence on the viscosity of the
heparin solution. The viscosity increases linearly w i t h in-
crease in dielectric constant ( 3 2 ) .
Moreuver it was proved that the viscosity of heparin is
dependent on the shear stress and the ionic strength of the
solutions (19). The viscosity decreases w i t h increase in shear
stress and increase in ionic strength. Desulphatation also
leads to a decrease i n viscosity ( 3 2 ) .
HEPARIN SODIUM 229
2.8. Optical R o t a t i o n
O p t i c a l rotation values for heparin-sodium frm the li-
terature are given in Table 2.2.
Table 2.3
Weight average mlecular weight of heparin sodium
.-
-0
2 20
.-0
c
.-L
a
Q
a,
I
-
a,
8. Et OSO3
8 *O 0 0 0 0 0 O D 0
e
c
F
u)
Q
s2
0
Z 60
NotThrou h '.
I R A - ~ O O ?OH) '.- .-. - . -. -_
-
I I 1 1 1 1
0 2 4 6 8 1 0 1 2
PH
F i g u r e 2.8
Titration curves of heparinic acid before and after passage
through IRA-400 i n the hydroxyl fonn. Titration curve f o r the
amount of ethyl s u l p h r i c acid (EtOSO3H) equivalent to sul-
phate groups estimated to be present in one mle of heparinic
acid; pblished by Helbert and Marini ( 3 8 ) .
Frcm the curves one can identify 40 ionisable sulphate
g r q s , 20 ionisable &xyl groups (S-shaped part of the
t i t r a t i o n curve) and 1 ionisable amino group for the product
examined (38). Furthermore, 6 to 7 equivalents of sodium sul-
phate per mle of heparin s o d i u m were detected, which do not
represent an integral ccmponent of the mlecule and which
could be removed w i t h an anion exchanger (e.g.: IRA-400, - '
H
0
form, see figure 2.8.) .
By means of conductanetric tests, Casu
and Gennaro cbtained values fran 1.94 - 2.40 f o r the ratio of
sulphate to car33oxyl groups in heparin (44).
232 FRIEDRICH NACHTMANN E T A .
Table 2.4
Elemental analysis of heparin sodium
% C % H % N %S
2.2 13.3 15.1 Bovine 35
2.5 9.0 13.1 Whale 35
2.1 14.2 12.5 Bovine lung 9
2.6 11.3 11.5 Bovine intestine 9
2.1 12.4 11.7 Porcine intestin1 9
2.3 7.3 9.2 Whale lung 9
2.3 8.2 9.0 Whale intestine 9
23.4 3.3 2.2 11.6 12.4 Porcine intestinc 38
22.2 3.5 2.1 11.3 11.6 Porcine intestin( 36
18.2 - 3.6 - 2.3 - 9.3 - 11.6 - Various origin 34
21.7 4.4 3.6 10.4 16.8
2.13. C r y s t a l Properties
X-ray fibre diffraction d a t a wre phlished by Nieduszyn-
ski and Atkins (46,47). Orientated f i l m of heparin sodium
(origin: porcine intestinal rmcosa) c r y s t a l l i s e in a triclinic
unit cell with parameters a = 1.30 4 0.01 nm, b = 1.02 4 0.01
run, c (fibre axis) = 1.59 4 0.02 nm, a = 104 4 lo, R = 96 4 lo,
HEPARIN SODIUM 233
3. Production
Heparin sodium is cbtained by extraction fran animal or-
gans. According to Scott and Charles, the lung, muscle and
liver are particularly suitable. Lately, it has also to an in-
creasing extent been abtained fran nucosa, whereby higher ac-
t i v i t i e s are attained (48). The mst recent development is to
use the k i n e obtained when pickling intestines as the r a w
mterial f o r the mufacture of heparin.
The prduction of heparin sodium takes place principally
i n two steps: isolation of a mre o r less p r e crude heparin
and subsequent p r i f i c a t i o n of the crude heparin t o obtain the
parenterally administrable p r d u c t .
The various procedures for the preparation of crude
heparin are based on the principle that heparin is withdrawn
fran the autolysed or digested organs by means of alkali and
a f t e r separation of the protein-lib acccmpanying substances,
precipita- with alcohols o r acetone as a barium or a l k a l i
salt.
Scott and Charles autolyse the frozen, d u t e d tissue
and extract the heparin with d i l u t e alkali (48). After pres-
sing out the protein mss coagulated on heating, the heparin
i s precipitated w i t h sulphuric acid a t pH 2.5. After removal
of f a t by means of alcohol and digestion with trypsin, the
crude heparin is then precipitated with t w i c e the munt of
alcohol.
Taylor imprwed t h i s mthod by using digestive enzyrnes
and carrying out several extractions w i t h alkali ( 4 9 ) . Taka-
m s a describes a deproteinisation of the mmsa extract w i t h
picric acid and subsequent precipitation with hydrochloric
acid a t pH 2.5 followed by precipitation of the heparin sodium
salt with n-ethanol (50). Thanpson precipitates the heparin out
of the filtered autolysate by means of cetylpyridinium chlo-
ride (51). Wins rmves the f a t fran the tempered, fermented
tissue azeotrqically by mans of dichloroethylene (52). Gede-
on Richter enriches the heparin i n a canplex w i t h protein by
means of heat coagulation and extracts i n a countercurrent of
saline solution (53). Riker uses proteolysis and the addition
of salt to release the heparin fran the tissue. It i s then ad-
234 FMEDRICH NACHTMANN ETAL.
4. Stability
4.1. Heparin Sodium
Lyophilised, dry heparin sodium can be stored f o r several
years a t roan temperawe and 3OoC, without loss of activity,
i f kept in tightly closed containers (56).
Figure 4.1 shaws the biological activity (AFTT activity)
of heparin sodium (origin: mcosa) detennined over a period of
4 years as a percentage of the declaration.
The product is stable a t room temperature (RT, 15 - 25OC)
and 3OOC. The other quality characteristics (pH value after
dissolution, colour index, colour stability) and the content
of active ingredient remained unchanged throughout the storage
period.
HEPARIN SODIUM 235
I
110
0 12 24 36 48
Months
Figure 4.1
S t a b i l i t y of heparin sodium (A type) a t roan temperature (RT)
and 3OoC
236 FRIEDRICH NACHTMANN ETAL.
L
0
$ 90 -
RT
110
100
c
0
s 90
80
0 12 24 36 48
Months
Fiqure 4.2
S t a b i l i t y of sterile aqueous solutions of heparin sodium
(5000 I U / m l ) a t roan temperature (RT) and 3OOC.
HEPARIN SODIUM 237
- R-dogenous heparin:
Rtiogenous h q a r i n released fran the roast cells is
immdiately taken up by macrophages and catabolysed. As a re-
sult, it loses its coagulation-inhibiting effect (89).
- &ogenous heparin:
Bparinase I and heparinitase I1 could be detected i n
the liver (90).
A heparin sulphamidase (91) and three different depoly-
merising enzymes (92) where also characterised. The degrada-
tion of heparin either takes place a t the heparin-antithrmbin
I11 canplex or a t the free substance i n the plasm.
Under the influence of disease ( l i v e r cyrrhosis), the
decrease in coagulation-inhibiting effect of i.v. administered
heparin is significantly slaver, since in such cases, the
240 FRIEDRICH NACHTMANN ETAL.
6. Methods of Analysis
6.1. I d e n t i f i c a t i o n %sts
Various tests can be used for the i d e n t i f i c a t i o n of
heparin:
6.1.3. Electrcphoresis
See chapter 6.8.
6.1.4. B i . o c h d c a l and B i o l o g i c a l Tests
The biochemical and biological rrethods given in chapters
6.10., 6.11. and 6.12. are selective f o r heparin and therefore
m y be used as i d e n t i t y tests.
6.2. C o l o r h t r i c Analysis
There are a large n h r of dyes which form a mtachro-
mtic colour a f t e r addition of heparin. Tests carried out by
Jaques e t al. shaved that BislMrCk hrown, azure A, b r i l l i a n t
cresol blue, cresol violet, brmcresol blue, neutral red,
basic fuchsin, pyronine and a c r i f l a v i n e a l l possess t h i s pro-
perty (96). Methylene blue (971, n i l e blue (98) or acridine
orange (99) are equally suitable. For the colorimetric deter-
mination of heparin there are three dyes which are mst often
used: toluidine blue (loo), alcian blue (101 - 103) and azure
A (103 - 106). ?he detection l i m i t f o r the determination of
heparin w i t h the dyes mentioned lies around 1 pg (103). I n the
presence of heparin i n d i l u t e , aqueous solution, t o l u i d i n e
blue e x h i b i t s 3 absorption bands (107). The a-band (620 nm)
corresponds t o t h e mnaneric dye, the &band (540 nm) t o the
dimeric dye and t h e p-band (500 nm) is produced by the binding
HEPARIN SODIUM 241
Table 6.1.
Characteristic data for the determination of heparin - with
t o l u i d i n e blue ( A ) , azure A (B) and alcian blue (C) .
Method Heparin Useful
range of
heparin I Regression Standard Correla-
equation
Y =
deviatioi tion coef-
of ficient
I
scatter
about re
pg gression
A Porcine rmcous 0.042 0.995
Bovine lung 0.045 0.995
B Porcinermcous 0.016 0.966
W i n e lung 0.065~-0.011 0.024 0.971
C Porcine rmcous 0.030 0.993
Bovine lung 0.008 0.999
6.5.1. Potenticmetric t i t r a t i o n
The procedure was described by klbert and Marini ( 3 8 ) .
Heparin sodium is passed through a column of Dowex-50 in the
hydrogen form. An a l i q u o t of this is titrated for acid groups.
Another aliquot is first passed through a column of IRA-400 i n
the hydraxyl form to ratwlve inorganic anions, then titrated.
The difference is due to the p i o n acid groups.
HEPARIN SODIUM 243
6.5.2. C o n d u c t h t r i c t i t r a t i o n
For determination of the carboxyl content, the dialyzed
sample of heparin sodium is t i t r a t e d with 0.1M Hc1 with a con-
ductimeter and e s t h t e d by the m u n t of standard acid needed
up to t h e f i r s t i n f l e c t i o n p i n t ( 4 4 ) . For sulphate plus car-
boxyl groups, t h e dialyzed sodium salt is converted to the
f r e e acid w i t h A m b e r l i t e IR-120 ( H
'
) and titrated with 0.1M
NaOH. !the f i r s t pint of i n f l e c t i o n is equivalent t o the sul-
&ate content, t h e second t o the sulphate and carboxyl con-
tent.
6.5.3. Colorimtric t i t r a t i o n
A colorimetric t i t r a t i o n is described by Jaques (107).
Heparin sodium is added t o a toluidine blue solution u n t i l the
colour changes f r a n blue to plrple. The colour abtained is
m t c h d with that abtained with reference heparin. The proce-
dure is a f a s t , semiquantitative test and applicable f o r both
crude and F r i f i e d preparations.
6.5.4. W i d i n e t r i c titration
Some plysaccharides react with quaternary alkylammnium
halides resulting i n a precipitate. The reaction of heparin
and other plysaccharides w i t h cetyltrimethylammnium bromide
was studied by recording the t u r b i d i t y by means of an automa-
tic t i t r a t i o n device (127).
6.5.5. Colloid t i t r a t i o n
The plyrrrer p l y d i a l lyldimethylamrronium chloride (Cat-
Floc) binds heparin stochianetrically. After addition of an
excess of Cat-Floc, back t i t r a t i o n is carried out w i t h p-
tassium plyvinylsulphate. Wluidine blue is used as the indi-
cator (128).
6.6. Turbidimetric and N e p h e l m t r i c Analysis
Heparin sodium forms s l i g h t l y soluble canplexes with
various reagents and these can be used f o r a quantitative de-
termination. M a r b e t and Winterstein describe the canplex with
2-(dimethylaminanethyl)dibenzofuran (129). The method was used
t o determine heparin in urine. me t u r b i d i t y of t h e heparin-
protamine canplex i n an excess of protamine was suggested by
Fekete f o r the determination of heparin (130). Another pssi-
b i l i t y is t h e use of the canplex of heparin with cetylpyridi-
nium chloride (131, 132). High t u r b i d i t y values =re found i n
the presence of a 0.4 M solution of sodium chloride. !he
method can be autanated (132).
244 FRIEDRICH NACHTMANN ETAL.
Ba&ital 0.12 8.6 0.99 0.90 (0.81) 0.83 0.86/ 1.04 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.67
0.97 0.93
'&is 0.12 7.5 0.98 (0.76) 0.90/ 0.91/ 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.69
0.95 0.98
KCl-Hcl 0.02 2.0 1.00 0.87- 0.66 0.71- 0.61- 0.70
1.03 0.90 0.92 0.79 0.82
(2)
HAC-LiOH 0.35 3.0 1.00 0.93 0.72 0.76 0.88 1.04 0.84 0.82 0.84
1.00
Ethylene- 0.1 8.0 1.00 1.00 0.92 0.92 0.89 1.04 1.16 1.05 1.16
diamine
Prcpyl- 0.025 8.5- 1.00 0.98 1.11 1.12 0.92 1.08 1.35 1.25 1.35 1.20
diamine 10.0
Percentage rerrraining a f t e r fixation w i t h CPC (M NaC1)
100 100 39 70 0 0 0 0 0 ?
%ference: Ieo Heparin No. 4439 and Upjohn Heparin Lot No. ZX320. Muc. = intestinal mcosa; KS =
keratomlphate. / indicates alternative values depending on samples or runs; two values unconnec-
ted indicates two separate bands. Forcine intestinal nucosa heparin usually gives bm bands in
barbital and acid M f e r s in varying proportions. cpc = cetylpyridinium chloride
HEPARIN SODIUM 247
6.8.5. Electrofocushg
A considerably greater heterogeneity of heparin is de-
tectable by mans of electrofocusing. Substances which show
2 bands in conventional electrophoretic systems can be resol-
ved into 21 bands by electrofocusing with ampblyte mixtures
(147). Polyacrylamide gel slabs (5.0 x 15 an), 0.2 an thick
containing 2 per cent of ampholyte (pH 3.0 to 5.0) f r a n LKB
(Sweden) were used. 100 t o 200 pg of heparin was applied to
the gel i n 2 p l volunrts a t 2 an f r a n t h e neyative end and
subjected to a p t e n t i a l of 15 V/cm f o r 18 hours. The 91 slab
was stained with toluidine blue. The 21 bands are d i s t r i b u t e d
between pH 4.2 and 3.2.
For 15 cannercia1 heparin samples tested, 21 f r a c t i o n s
were found by electrofocusing (148). These fractions shm a
mlecular-weight range from 3,000 t o 37,500 with a constant
i n t e r v a l between mlecular w i g h t s . me technique is s p e c i f i c
and unequivocally distinguishes heparin f r a n other acid mco-
polysaccharides. Results by f i g h e t t i and G i a n a z z a d m n s t r a t e
that t h e charge heterogeneity of heparin absented i n electro-
focusing is e l i c i t e d by strong interaction of t h i s p l y -
saccharide with Ampholine, the mixture of amphoteric sub-
stances used to generate and s t a b i l i z e the pH-gradient (149).
6.8.6. and lung o r i g i n
Ccinparison of heparin of mcosal
The differences wre summrised recently by W f i e and
Cuwie (150).
When electrofocused fractions are eluted f r a n the gel and
subsequently exposed to plyacrylamide electrcphoresis, a
range of mlecular w i g h t s is abtained. ?his is true of hepa-
rin of mcosal or lung origin. An important difference exists,
hawever, between lung and mcosal heparins. This is shown i n
figure 6.1. Unfractionated lung heparin y i e l d s a s i n g l e ccm-
ponent i n agarose, a d i f f u s e band i n plyacrylamide and 22
c c n p n e n t s upon electrofocusing. Unfractionated mcosal hepa-
rin yields two canponents in agarose, a d i f f u s e band in p l y -
HEPARIN SODIUM 249
-
ELECTROPHORETIC MIGRATION PATTERNS IN:
a b C
-
Heparin Agarose Polyacrylamide LKB Ampholyte
Single Fraction
from l c I I I
Single Fraction
from 2c II II Ill
Figure 6.1
Sumnary diagram of electrophoretic patterns abtained for dif-
ferent heparinS prior t o and following e l e c t r o f m i n g , accor-
ding to McDuffie and Cawie (150).
Mhen mlecular wights of the lung heparin fractions are
determined i n plyacrylamide gels, a family of different chain
lengths is &served. Molecular w i g h t determinations of mu-
ccsal heparin fractions, containing 2 canponents, yield 2
f d l i e s of differing &ain lengths w i t h a high degree of
parallelism.
250 FRIEDRICH NACHTMANN E T A .
6.9.4. G e l chranatography
G e l chranatography has been used f o r mny pars f o r frac-
tionating heparin. During the last few years an improvemnt
was made by introducing high pressure liquid chrcmtography
(WE)
Many authors describe separations using Sephadex-gels.
Skalka used Sephaaex G l O O and 200 (170). It was found that in
low ionicstrength eluents the mlecules of heparin are alte-
red to such an extent that they cannot penetrate into the
accessible pores of the gels. In solution of a higher ionic
strength, they are retarded even on 6 1 0 0 .
Porcine heparin was fractionated into 10 fractions of
varying mlecular w i g h t by gel f i l t r a t i o n on Sephadex G l O O
by Laurent et al. (171). Anticoagulant activity of the frac-
tions increased w i t h mlecular weight up to 18,000 and then
was f a i r l y constant.
Many ccnurercial heparin sodium injections (5 000 I U / m l )
wre fractional on a 2.5 x 45 cm column of Sephadex 6 5 0 , me-
dium grade (172). ?he heparin was eluted with d i s t i l l e d w a t e r
a t a flow rate of 36 ml/h. Each one m l fraction was mnitored
mtachranatically for heparin content by mixing 50 p l of the
fraction with 3 m l of an aqueous solution of 0.0025 per cent
toluidine blue and n-easuring the transmittance a t 500 m. X-k-
parin preparations of nucosal and lung origin gave similar re-
HEPARIN SODIUM 253
H-BPhe-PreArg .+N%<=’=3
thrallbin
5-43
0
?he excitation wavelength is 335 nm, the enission wave-
length 430 nm. The method is used for the determination of
heparin in humn plasm.
258 FRIEDRICH NACHTMANN ETAL.
Table 6.4
D i r e c t hematolcgical heparin tests on blood or plasma
Wle 6.5
Pharmacological coagulation tests
Tests in vivo
Jorpes e t al. Sheep with i n 4 l l i n g 208
catheters
Kuo e t al. Blood samples fran 240,107
conscious, trained dogs
7. fleferences
1 Mc Lean J.,
Am. J. Physiol. -
41, 250 (1916)
2 W c k A.J.,
Am. J. Physiol. -
123, 712 (1938)
3 Jeanloz R.W. in Horton D. and Harp A. (eds.) ,
?he Carbohydrates - Charistry and Biochemistry,
Academic Press, New York 1970, p. 614
4 Casu B.,
Pharm. fles. Comrmn. 11,1 (1979)
5 Rerlin A.S. Mc Duffle N.M. (ed.),
Heparin: Structure, Cellular Functions and Clinical
Applications, Academic P r e s s , New York 1979, p. 25
6 Linker A. and Hovingh P. in Mc Duffle N.M. (ed.),
Heparin: Structure, Cellular F’unctions and Clinical
Applications, Academic Press, New York 1979, p. 3
7 Rosenberg R.D. and Lam L.,
Proc. N a t l . Wad. Sci. USA 76, 1218 (1979)
8 lbbisch H . ,
Deutsch. Apthekerztg. 34, 120 (1980)
9 Kotcku T. , Yoelzawa 2. and Yamanchi F.,
A r c h . Biochem. Biophys. 9,553 (1967)
10 Burson Jr. S.L., Fahrenbach M.J., F r d a g e n L.H.,
Riccardi B.A., Bruwn R.A., Brockman J.A., L e ~ r yH.V. and
Stdcstad E.L.R.,
J. Am. Chm. SOC. -78, 5874 (1956)
11 Casu B. and Reggiani M. ,
I1 Famco Ed. Sci. 11,934 (1956)
12 Cabassi F. , (2%B. and P e r l i n A.S. ,
Carbohydr. fles. 63, 1 (1978)
13 Casu B. , Scovenna G., Lifonelli A.J. and P e r l i n A.S. ,
Carbohydr. Res. 63, 13 (1978)
14 Bell K. and Krantz Jr. J.C.,
J. Am. Pharm. Assoc. -
39, 94 (1950)
15 Awe W. and Stiidemann K.D.,
Arzneimittel-Forsch. 1, 624 (1957)
16 Ferrari L. and I k Ambrosi G.,
I1 Farmaco Ed. P r . 24, 360 (1969)
264 FRIEDRICH NACHTMANN ETAL,.
17 Stone A.L. ,
Nature -
216, 551 (1967)
18 Stone A.L. ,
BiplyIuers 10, 739 (1971)
19 Chmg M.C.M. and E l l e r t o n N.F.,
Biclplymers -
15, 1409 (1976)
20 Park J.W. and C h a k r a b a r t i B.,
B i d e m . B i c p l q s . Res. Comrmn. 78, 604 (1977)
21 Stone A.L. ,
Fed. Proc. -
36, 101 (1977)
22 V i l l i e r s C., Braud C. and V e r t M.,
Carbohydr. Res. 83, 335 (1980)
23 Gatti G. , Casu B. and Perlin A.S. ,
B i d e m . Bicphys. Res. Comrmn. 85 (l), 14 (1978)
24 G a t t i G., Casu B., Ehmer G.K. and Perlin A.S. ,
Macramolecules 12 (5), 1001 (1979)
25 Ferlin A.S.,
Fed. Proc. - 36 (11, 106 (1977)
26 Perlin A.S. , Cam B. and Anderson G.R. ,
Can J. Chem. - 48, 2260 (1970)
27 Perlin A.S. and Hamer G.K.,
Polym. Prepr. , Am. Chem. &. , Div. Polym. Chem. 2 (2),
242 (1978)
28 F e r l i n A . S . ,
N g Ying Kin N.M.K. and B h a t t a c h a r j e e S.S.,
Can. J. Chm. -
50, 2437 (1972)
29 The Merck Index, Merck & Co., Inc, Rahway, N.J., 1976,
p. 608
30 Martindale, ?he Extra Pharmacopoeia, 27th edition,
The P h a n n a c e u t i c a l Press, Undon 1977, p. 718
31 Laker S.E.,
Fed. P r o c . -
36, 92 (1977)
32 Y u a n L. and Stivala S.S.,
BiplyIuers - 11, 2079 (1972)
33 Jaques L.B. , Kavanagh L. and Lavallk A. ,
A r z n e h Forsch. 17,774 (1967)
34 bvanagh L.W. and Jaques L.B.,
Arzneh. Forsch. 23, 605 (1973)
35 Yosizawa Z.,
B i d e m . B i c p h y s . Res. CanmXn. 2, 336 (1964)
HEPARIN SODIUM 265
36 Nachtmann F.,
unpublished results
37 Jensen R. , Suellm 0. and Syl& B. ,
J. B i o l . Chm. -
174, 265 (1948)
38 Helbert J.R. and Marhi. M.A.,
Biochemistry -
2, 1101 (1963)
39 Sandoz A.G.,
unpublished results
40 Sugisaka N. and Petracek F.J.,
Fed. Proc. - 36, 89 (1977)
41 Fbdriguez H.J. and Vanderwielen A.J. ,
J. Pharm. Sci. 68, 588 (1979)
42 W r i g u e z H.J. ,
Anal. L e t t . 9, 497 (1976)
43 Mc Duffle N.M., D i e t r i c h C.P. and Nader H.B.,
Biqolyners - 14, 1473 (1975)
44 Cam B. and G e m U.,
Ca&ohydr. Fks. 2, 168 (1975)
45 Herwats L., Laszlo P. and G em P. ,
Nouv. J. Chh. I, 173 (1977)
46 Nieduszynski I.A. and A t k i n s E.D.T. ,
Blochem. J. - 135, 729 (1973)
47 A t k i n s E.D.T. and Nieduszynski I.A.,
Adv. E K p . Med. B i o l . 52, 19 (1974)
48 Scott D.A. and Charles A.F.,
J. B i o l . men. 102, 431 (1933)
49 Taylor E.M. and Moloney P.J. ,
U S Pat. 2 587 924 (1948)
50 Takamasa Y.,
JA-Pat. 64 001 691 (1964)
51 Tl-tcdnpson Farmus Chnpany, U S P a t 3.451 196 (1969)
52 Wins A.H. ,
Ca US P a t . 627 807 (1975)
53 Gedeon Richter, D P a t . 3010972 (1980);
t) P a t . 365 927 (1982)
54 W i l l i a m s R.E. ,
Riker Labs. , D Pat. 1 253 868 (1962/67)
55 Scherhg AG, D Pat 2 800 943 (1978)
266 FRIEDRICH NACHTMANN ETAL.
56 Sand02 A.G.,
unpublished results
57 Gocdall K.T., Chooi C.C. and Gallus A.S.,
J. C l i n . P a t h o l . -
33, 1206 (1980)
58 Bowie H.M. and Haylor V.,
J. C l i n . Phann. -
3, 211 (1978)
59 Stock S.L. and W a r n e r N.,
Br. Med. J. 3, 307 (1971)
60 b d b y E.D., Hirsh J. and Adeniyi-Jones C.,
Can. Med. Assoc. J. 106,562 (1972)
61 Mitchell J.F., Baqer R.C. and Cantwell L.,
Am. J. IJosp. Phann. 33, 540 (1976)
62 Joy R.T., Hyneck M.L., Bernard1 R.R. and Ho N.F.H.,
Am. J. Hosp. Phann. 36, 618 (1979)
63 Jaccbs J., K l e t t e r D., Superstine E., H i l l K.R.,
Lynn B. and Webb R.A.,
J. C l i n . P a t h o l . 26, 742 (1973)
64 Olcuno T. and Nelson C.A.,
J. C l i n . P a t h o l . 28, 494 (1975)
65 Engelberg H.,
Fed. P r o c . Fed. Am. Soc. Exp. B i o l . - 36, 70 (1977)
66 Heilbrunn L.V.,
The Dynamic of L i v i n g P r o t o p l a m , Academic Press, New
York 1956
67 B r i n k h o w K.M., Smith H.P., Warner E.D. and Seegers W.H.,
Am. J. P h y s i o l . 125, 683 (1939)
68 T h m s D.P., Barrwcliffe T.W. and Johnson E.A.,
MS.Scand. J. Haematpl. Suppl. - 36 (25), 40 (1980)
69 Barmcliffe T.W., Johnson E.A., Eggleton C.A. and
TfiaMs D.P.,
Thranb. k s . - 12, 27 (1977)
70 Htsijk M., B j i j r k I., €bpwood J. and L i n d a h l U.,
FE8S ktt. 66, 90 (1976)
71 Rosenberg R.D. and Damus P.S.,
J. B i o l . C h a . -
248, 6490 (1973)
72 Y h E.T., Wessler S. and S t o l l P.J.,
J. B i o l . Chm. - 246, 3703 (1971)
73 bwes J. and Pepper D.S.,
'Ihranb. ks. 14,845 (1979)
HEPARIN SODIUM 267
235 B r i t i s h P h a u n a c c p e i a 1980
bn&n Her Malesty's Stationery O f f i c e 1980, p. A 147
236 m t e h M. and *nand A.,
J. P h y s i o l . 47, 419 (1955)
237 M o 1 i n a r i M . L . and Zoni G.,
Boll. a i m . Fann. - 116, 149 (1977)
238 Kaller H.,
Arch. Intern. Phaunaccdynamie 99, 163 (1954)
239 Lowary L.R., Smith F.A., rCryne E. and Dunham N.M.,
J. Phann. S k i . -
60, 638 (1971)
240 Walton P.L., Ricketts C.R. and Bangham D.R.,
B r i t . J. Ihemtol. - 12, 310 (1966)
241 Shah G.A., Dhall T.Z., Ferguson I., Davies M.R.,
Graham D.T., Pomeroy A.R. and D h a l l D.P.,
J. C l h . P a t h o l . -
33, 562 (1980)
242 Nachtrtlann F.,
unpublished results
243 Baragham D.R. and Woodward P.M.,
B u l l . WHO -
42, 129 (1970)
HYDROCORTISONE
Klaus Florey
1. Introduction 278
1.1 Foreword 278
1.2 Histoory 278
2. Description 278
2.1 Name, Formula, Molecular Weight 278
2.2 Appearance, Color, Odor 279
3. Isolation and Synthesis 279
3.1 Isolation 279
3.2 Chemical Synthesis 279
3.3 Biosynthesis 280
4. Physical Properties 28 I
4.1 Spectra 28 1
4.2 Solid Properties 289
4.3 Solution Properties 293
5. Methods of Analysis 294
5.1 Historical Synopsis 294
5.2 Elemental Analysis 296
5.3 Ultraviolet 296
5.4 Colorimetric 297
5.5 Fluorescence 299
5.6 Polarographic 300
5.7 Isotope Dilution 300
5.8 Chromatographic Methods 300
5.9 Electrophoretic 306
5.10 Bioassay-Enzymatic 308
5. I 1 Saturation Analysis 308
6. Stability-Degradation 309
7. Metabolic Products-Pharmacokinetics 310
8. Determination in Biological Fluids and Tissues 313
9. Determination in Pharmaceutical Formulation 3 14
References 315
1. Introduction
1.1Foreword
The compilation of an analytical profile
for hydrocortisone, also known as cortisol, turned
out to be a more ambitious undertaking than I had
expected. When scanning through Chemical Abstracts,
the literature is simply staggering. Fortunately,
there are quite a few very good and easily acces-
sible books and reviews available which will lead
the reader to secondary sources. First and fore-
most, there is the classic book on steroids by
Fieser and Fieser.' Helpful are also the more
modern books,on steroid analysis by Heftman* and
Gordg and Szaz.3 As in the case of aspirin, I have
endeavored to cover the newer literature as compre-
hensively as possible and have included only those
older references which are of historical interest.
Again, my apologies to all those scientists whose
publications in this field are not included here.
1.2History
Althouqh hydrocortisone is the major
hormone secreted by-the human adrenal cortex , it
was by no means the first adrenocortical hormone to
be isolated by the early investigators.
Reichstein14 the first to publish its isolation
from adrenal glands, gave it the letter M (see also
Section 3 ) . When Kendall and Hench made their
momentous discovery of the relief of the symptom of
rheumatoid arthritis5 in 1948, cortisone was the
first hormone to be made available by Merck and
Company. Only in the early fifties was hydrocorti-
sone also introduced into therapy, but was soon
eclipsed in potency and effectiveness by analogs
such as the A 1 - and 9a-halo compounds. Yet, it
still is much prescribed, since it is relatively
inexpensive. It is still the ultimate standard by
which the efficacy of other corticosteroids is
measured.
2. Description
2.1 Name, Formula, Molecular Weight
Hydrocortisone is pregn-4-3,20 dione,
11,17,21-trihydroxy-, ( 1 1 B l - i also 4-pregnene-118,
1701, 21-triol-3,20-dioneI 17-hydroxycorticosterone;
Reichstein's compound M; Kendall's compound F;
HYDROCORTISONE 219
21 CH20H
I
c=o
CH2OH CH2OH
I I
c=o C=O
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.o
x (nm)
- log E
315 1.82
324 1.75
332 1.73
338 1.65
346 1.56
357 1.23
4.13Fluorescence
Hydrocortisone does not have any
native fluorescence, but it can be induced by
reaction with concentrated acids (see Section 5.5).
4.14Phosphorescence
The singlet + triplet transitions by
phosphogescence excitation spectroscopy at both 77
1
and 4.2 K were studied for several steroids.25
The following data pertain to hydrocortisone:
Phosphorescence emission: 3880 origin; 4350 8
maximum; So+T absorption: 3826 ; S-tS (rl,II) dire t
absorption: 3,600, 3,440, 3,310 ; A E: 1600 cm E .
4.15 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance26
The 100 MHz proton NMR spectrum of
hydrocortisone in DMs0-d~is shown in Figure 2.
The spectrum contains characteristic resonances at
6 0.76 s (l8-CH3), 61.37 s (19-CH3), 65.55 s (C4-H),
64.26 M ((211-H) and a coupled A B quartet at 64.50,
4.05 (21-CH2). Three peaks that exchange with D20
were detected at 65.14, 4.64 and 4.26 (11, 17 and
21-OH). All proton chemical shifts are referenced
to internal TMS at 0.0 PPM.
The carbon-13 NMR spectrum of hydro-
cortisone (Figure 3) is summarized in Table 1.
Assignments of all 21 carbons are listed and are
consistent with those of Blunt and Stothers.27 The
reference peak in the carbon spectrum was the DMSO
multiplet which was assigned as 39.5 PPM from TMS.
The spectra shown in Figures 2 and 3
were obtained on a Varian XL-100-15 NMR spectro-
meter equipped with a Nicolet TT-100 data system.
4.16Mass28
The low-resolution mass spectrum of
hydrocortisone (see Figure 4) shows the expected M+
at m/z 362. Corticosteroids generally show frag-
Figure 2. Proton NMR spectrum of hydrocortisone. Instrument: Varian XL-100-15.
N
oo
01
01-MRY-80 MB0764
1001
90-
80.-
>
I-
II)
70.-
Z
I
z
U
W
>
U
l-
a
J
w
CY
MRSS/CHRRGE
I N T E N S I T Y SUM = 4 0 8 2 5 BRSE PERK Z = 3 . 4 3
m/z 313
M+ m/z 362
m/z 329
\r m/z 267
* Scheme is intended to show losses rather than to
explicitly show fragmentation pathways.
** Rearrangement
288 KLAUS FLOREY
L m/z 267 -
20 d (8) I
- 1/10
19. 80 4.48 4.5 0.052
20.49 4.33 2.0 0.023
20.98 4.23 1.0 0.012
23.52 3.78 2.5 0.029
24.50 3.63 0.5 0. 006
27.59 3.23 1.5 0.017
Water 0.029 (1 in 3 , 5 0 0 )
Ethano1 2.5 (1 in 4 0 )
Acetone 1.25 (1 in 8 0 )
Propylene glycol 1.0 (1 in 100)
Slightly soluble in chloroform, almost
insoluble in ether.
The solubility/tem erature profile
in ethanol ranges from 6.3% at 65' to 1 . 5 % at 25°.49
The solubility in water is increased by the addition
of surfactants such as Tween 20 ( 0 . 0 2 7 mol. of
steroid/mol. of Tween 20) .50 The solubility in
tris-buffered KC1 was found to be 161.0 1-1 molesfi
and,in egg lecithin liquid crystals, 1 5 . 5 n moles/
P mol. lipid.51 The solubilization of hydro-
cortisone and other steroids by long-chain polyoxy-
ethylene surfactantsS2 as well as in polyethylene-
glycol fatty acid esters53 has been studied.
Calculations on the dissolution of
hydrocortisone have been presented in connection
with comparing the measurement of the interfacial
energy between solid particles and a dissolving
solvent to the film theory of dissolution in which
diffusion is the principal mechanism.54 A non-sink
dissolution rate equation has also been applied to
hydrocortisone.55
4.32 Partition Coefficients, Diffusion
An extensive list of partition co-
294 KLAUS FLOREY
TABLE 3
Partition Coefficients for Hydrocortisone
(from reference 56)
1. Benzene/water 0.36
2. Benzene/50% methanol in water 0.14
3. Benzene/50% methanol in water 0.31
4. Petroleum ether/35% ethanol in water <o. 02
5. 25% Sec. butanol in n-hexane/water 0.24
6. 35% Sec. butanol in n-hexane/water 0.84
7. 25% Ethyl acetate in n-hexane/water 0.04
8. 50% Ethyl acetate in n-hexane/water 1.00
9. 30% Ethyl acetate in cyclohexane/30% ethanol
in water 0.31
10. 30% Ethyl acetate in cyclohexane/50% ethanol
in water 0.08
11. 30% Ethyl acetate in cyclohexane/70% ethanol
in water 0.04
12. 50% Ethyl acetate in cyclohexane/30% ethanol
in water 0.96
13. 50% Ethyl acetate in cyclohexane/50% ethanol
in water 0.39
14. 50% Ethyl acetate in cyclohexane/70% ethanol
in water 0.16
15. 70% Ethyl acetate in cyclohexane/30% ethanol
in water 2.7
16. 70% Ethyl acetate in cyclohexane/50% ethanol
in water 1.2
17. 70% Ethyl acetate in cyclohexane/70% ethanol
in water 0.02
18. Ethyl acetate/water 12.2
19. Water/carbon tetrachloride 0.16
20. 30% Methanol in water/70% chloroform in carbon
tetrachloride 0.70
21. 50% Methanol in water/50% chloroform in carbon
tetrachloride 2.6
22. 70% Methanol in water/30% chloroform in carbon
tetrachloride 5.9
23. 30% Ethanol in water/carbon tetrachloride 0.06
24. 0.05% NaCl in water/50% n-hexane in chloroform 2.57
25. 20% Ethanol in water/50% n-hexane in chloroform 2.57
26. 30% Ethanol in water/chloroform 0.06
27. 30% Ethanol in water/50% n-hexane in chloroform 1.63
28. 50% Ethanol in water/50% n-hexane in chloroform 0.61
29. 0.1N Acetate buffer/methylene chloride 0.12
30. 20% Methanol in water/50% n-hexane in chloroform 4.0
31. 80% Methanol in water/l.2-dichlvroethane 1.26
2% KLAUS FLOREY
5.3 Ultraviolet
The stronq abscmption band in the ultra-
violet ( A max 242 nm; Ei 445, see section 4.12) has
been used for quantitation of hydrocortisone itself
(cf. 21), but due to the interference of excipients,
it rarely can be used in the quantitative determi-
nation of dosage forms without difficulties. The
sodium borohydride method of GorZjg66 overcomes this
obstacle by using the reduced solution as a blank
in the reference cell. Kir~chbaurn~~ found that
addition of propylene glycol assures complete
reduction.
HYDROCORTISONE 297
5.4 Colorimetric
5.41 Sulfuric Acid
It was already known in the thirties
that steroids give color reactions with concentrated
sulfuric acid (cf. 3, p. 1 8 2 ) . A s already mentioned,
Z a f f a r ~ n iwas
~ ~ the first to apply it to hydro-
cortisone. He found absorption maxima at 2 8 0 , 3 9 5
and 4 7 5 mp. My personal prejudice concerning this
method coincides with that of Gorog and S z z z , who
....
state (cf. 3, p. 1 8 2 ) : I' spectra are not
reproducible as well as in the common solvents: the
positions and intensities of the maxima depend on
the time elapsed between dissolution of the steroid
and the recording of the spectrum, the temperature,
the quality of the sulfuric acid, the purity of the
sample, etc." The method today seems to be only of
historical interest, and I refer the reader to the
classical paper by Bernstein and Lenhard6* and the
chapter by Smith and Bernstein.69
They present the following data for
hydrocortisone:
1%
max (nm) Elcm
237 420
2 82 462
391 325
475 1 53
5.43 Porter-Silber
The principle of the Porter-Silber
method62 is the reaction of the dihydroxyacetone
side chain with phenylhydrazine in methanolic
sulfuric acid to produce a stable yellow color with
a maximum at 410 nm. This reaction is specific for
17-hydroxy steroids, and the sensitivity of the
method permitted its use to determine glucocorti-
costeroids in biological fluids. It was first
applied in 1952 to determine h y d r o c ~ r t i s o n ein
~~
urine and in 1957 to plasma75. With the advent of
chromatographic and RIA techniques, the method
may no longer have the importance it once had, but
it still is described in a modern (1975) book on
the determination of hormones.76
5.44Tetrazolium
The tetrazolium methods still belonq-
to the most important analytical techniques to
determine corticosteroids as such and in pharma-
ceutical preparations. For an excellent discussion
of mechanism and history, see reference 3 , p. 331.
It was first used for hydrocortisone as a spray
reagent for paper chromatography by Burton,
Zaffaroni and Keutman.77 Mader and Buck are
credited with extending the use of tetrazolium to
pharmaceutical steroid analysis but did not
describe the application to hydrocortisone in
their original paper.63 Hydrocortisone was first
quantitated by Henley,78 using 2-iodophenyl-3-
nitrophenyl-phenyl tetrazolium chloride. The USP33
favors the use of blue tetrazolium (B.T.; diani-
sole-bis-diphenyl tetrazolium chloride), the B.P.32
the use of triphenyl tetrazolium chloride (TZ) for
the determination of hydrocortisone and its dosage
forms. Absorbance maxima for the two variants are
at 525 nm and at 485 nm, respectively. The tetra-
zolium method is stability indicating, albeit an
indirect one measuring the reducing capacity of
the steroid side chain to form formazans. The
blue tetrazolium method has also been automated
for the assay of hydrocortisone in tablet^.^^^,^^
HYDROCORTISONE 299
5.45 Miscellaneous
For the determination of the free
21-hydroxy group of hydrocortisone in the presence
of its acetate,oxidation of the side chain with
cupric acetate to the glyoxal and condensation
with 0-phenylenediamine, (A max 331 nm, E 10,200) or
its 4,5-dimethyl derivative ( A max 351 nm, E 12,700)
have been used.80 Condensation with phenylhydrazine
gives an absorption maximum at 364 nm ( E = 19,000)
which has been used for the determination of hydro-
cortisone in tablets.81 For the determination of
residual hydrocortisone in prednisolone, the rate of
thiosemicarbazone formation was determined at
3 0 2 nm.82 A l s o used were reactions with Dische 83
reagent (diphenylamine in acetic and sulfuric acid),
bismuth oxidation,84 condensation with isonicotinic
acid hydrazide (370 nmIa5 also automated for
tabletsa6 and reaction with ammonium molybdate
(A max 655 nm) . 8 7
5.5 Fluorescence
Although hydrocortisone has no native
fluorescence, it can be induced by treatment with
concentrated sulfuric acid. This was already
observed by Wintersteiner and Pfiffners8 in 1936.
The various conditions of acid concentration and
temperature leading to slight variations of the
excitation wavelength (470 nm) and absorption
maximum (530 nm) as well as intensity of fluores-
cence are described by Goldzieher.89 The great
sensitivity of the reaction made it an ideal tool
to study the concentration of hydrocortisone in
biological fluids and tissues in a quantitative
fashion. It was first explored by Sweatgo in 1954.
He was able to determine as little as 5 nanograms
of hydrocortisone in 1 ml of ethanolic sulfuric
acid. The early work on the fluorimetric analysis
in several laboratories has been reviewed by
Silber.gl Phosphoric acid has also been used to
induce fluorescence,92r93as have been acetic acid-
antimony t r i ~ h l o r i d e ,aluminum
~~ salt and isonico-
tinylhydrazine (Ex.: 380 nm; Em: 495 nrnlg4 and
lithium hydroxide pellets (Ex.: 396/Em: 510) .95
A fluorescing derivative, amenable to TLC,96 has
been obtained by reactions with 4(6-methylbenzo-
thiazol-2yl) phenyl isocyanate.
300 KLAUS FLOREY
5.6Polarographic
Rased on the reduction of the 3-carbonyl
-
function, the polarographic reduction of hydro-
cortisone has been studied in well-buffered 50%
ethanol solutions.97 The halfwave potential ( E % )
was found to be dependent on pH, ranging from -1.26
for pH 2.8 to -1.74 for pH 10.8. A halfwave
potential of -1.50 was found in 90% ethanol at
pH 8.5.98 In DMF buffered at pH 9.15, a halfwave
potential of -1.64V was found.99 In acetonitrile-
tetrabutylammonium perchlorate, a halfwave potential
of -1.58 was found. The approximate detection limit
was determined as 3~10'~moles/liter . Polar-
ography of hydrocortisone has also been performed
with prior derivatization with Girard's reagent T
exhibiting a halfwave potential of 1.12lo1 and
betainyl hydrazine (E$ -1.42).98 Polarography has
been used for the determination of hydrocortisone
in ointments,99r102human bloodlol (see sections 8
and 9), and as a microbial conversion product after
TLC separations.lo3
5.7Isotope Dilution
Preparation of tritiated hydrocortisone
and its detection in fermentation brothlo4 and
adrenal sliceslo5 has been described.
5.8Chromatographic Methods
5.81 Paper
With the advent of TLC and HPLC, the
importance of paper chromatographic methods to
determine hydrocortisone declined steeply. It now
is only of historical interest. Yet, in the fifties
it was successfully used to enlarge the knowledge of
the distribution of hydrocortisone in body fluids
and tissues and to assay its purity, as well as
stability in dosage forms.
Both the Bushlo6 and Z a f f a r ~ n i ~ ~
type of chromatographic systems have been used for
hydrocortisone,and a typical sam ling is presented
in Table 4 according to Neher. o y Additional
systems can be found in references 108, 109, and
110. The use of fully acetylated paper,lll paper
impregnated with stearato chromic chloride for
reverse phase as well as centri-
fugal acceleration113has been applied to hydro-
cortisone.
HYDROCORTISONE 301
TABLE 4
Paper Chromatographic Systemslo7
Zaffaroni Type Systems:
Propylene/toluene 0.01
Formamide/chloroform 0.24
Formamide/ethyl acetate-butyl acetate-
water (15:85:1) 0.40
Formamide/butyl acetate:water (100:5) 0.42
Formamide/n-butanol-butyl acetate-
water (15:85:5) 0.60
Bush Type Systems:
Hexane-tert. butanol-methanol-water 0.19
Benzene-methanol-water (100:50:50) 0.25
Cyclohexane-dioxane-methanol-water
(4:4:2:1) 0.25
Toluene-ethyl acetate-methanol-
water (9O:lO: 50: 50) 0.37
Water and methanol, water (3:7) Trifluoroethylene beads coated Ultraviolet 148
with Amberlite LA-1
Ethyl acetate ( 5 % ), acetonitrile Zipax coated with oxydipropionitrile Ultraviolet 150
(0.2%) in hexane
1%Methanol in water Cyano ethyl silicone Ultraviolet 151
Aqueous ethanol with tetrapentyl Silica coated with octadecyl silane Ultraviolet 154
ammonium chloride
1.5% Methanol and 0.2% water Silica gel Ultraviolet 155
in chloroform
Methanol, water, acetic acid c18 Bondapak Ultraviolet 156
(53:42: 5)
Methylene chloride, methanol, Silica gel Ultraviolet 157
tetrahydrofuran, acetic acid
Acetonitrile, water, glacial ODS Ultraviolet 158
acetic acid (38:60:2)
Methanol-O.OlM ammonium acetate c18 Bondapak (gradient elution) Ultraviolet 159
pH 6.9 (10:90)
60% aqueous methanol c18 Lichrosorb Ultraviolet 160
TABLE 6 (Cont'd)
chain eliminated the side chain during vaporization and that the retention time
was that of the corresponding 17-keto compound. The main use of gas chromato-
graphy has been found in the determination of hydrocortisone in biological
fluids where it is competing with radioimmunoassays. Recently, it has been
coupled with mass spectrometry.165 GC/MS and RIA methods have been
Some typical data are presented in Table 7.
5.9 Electrophoretic
Hydrocortisone, being neutral, should not be moved by electrophoresis.
However, there is a report that hydrocortisone migrated in pH 7.0 phosphate buff-
er and pH 10 bicarbonate buffer when subjected to high voltage electroph~resis?~~
TABLE 7
GAS CHROMATOGRAPHIC SYSTEM
COLUMN
DERIVATIZATION COLUMN PACKINGS TEMP. DETECTOR REF.
-
- Silicone SE-30 on 222 Flame ionization 164
Chromosorb W
Trimethylsilyl ether 3% dimethylpolysiloxane - Flame ionization 167
on Gas Chrom. P
Methoxime-trimethylsilyl ether 1% SE-30 on Gas Chrom. P 250 Flame ionization 168
Methoxime-trimethylsilyl ether 3% OV-1 Diatomite CQ 240 Flame ionization 169
Periodate oxidation to SE-30 250 Flame ionization 170
w
eticholenic acid
0
rl llfksilylether and 17,21 1% OV-1 on Chromosorb G 240 Flame ionization 171
cyclic dimethyl
s iliconide
Trimethylsilyl ether-enol- 1% OV-1 on Gas Chrom. P 250 Flame ionization 172
trimethylsilyl ether
Chromium trioxi.de oxidation to 3% OV-17 on Chromosorb W 230 Electron capture 173
androstenetrione and forma-
tion of heptofluorobutyrate
3.20 Dimethoxime-11,17,21 tri- 3% SE-30 - Mass fragmentography 165
methylsilyl ether at m/e 636; m/e 638
(14C-hydrocortisone)
308 KLAUS FLOREY
5.10Bioassay-Enzymatic
The original workers, isolating hydro-
cortisone and other adrenal hormones from adrenal
tissue, used adrenalectomized animals and later on
such tests as the liver glycogen, e ~ s i n o p h i l , ~ ~ ~
thymus involution' and electrolyte-excret-
ing177 (cf. 1, 600ff). The enzyme 20-B-hydroxy
steroid dehydrogenase coupled with DPNH has also
been used to determine hydrocortisone in blood
plasma.178
5.11Saturation Analysis
The great importance of the accurate
determination of hydrocortisone body fluid levels
in normal and diseased states has led to the
development of the following techniques which can
be classified as saturation analysis.' Each of the
techniques has its proponents and pitfalls,179 but
at present, radioimmunoassay seems to be the most
useful.
5.111
Competitive Protein Binding
A review of this technique can be
found in the chapter by W. R. Slaunwhite, Jr. in
reference 2. Murphy first employed this technique
to study hydrocortisone levels in plasma and other
body fluids.lso,lB1 The competition of hydro-
cortisone in the plasma sample with added hydro-
cortisone-4-C14 for corticosteroid-binding globulin
(a1 fraction) is the basis of the method. The
method was extended to urine and the purification
prior to assay refined.l*' TLC has been used for
prepurification.183 Tritiated instead of carbon-14
labelled hydrocortisone has also been used.178
Horse transcortin was used to measure hydrocort-
isone in umbilical cord serum and amniotic f 1 ~ i d . l ~ ~
A commercial kit has been described.186 Ultra-
centrifugation was used to determine unbound
hydrocortisone.187
5.112 Double Isotope Derivative Assay
The double isotope derivative
assay is a modification of competitive protein
binding analysis where a trace amount of tritiated
hydrocortisone is added to determine recovery
values durin extraction. In a comparison of the
two methods,q 8 8 it was found that generally there
is good agreement; however, a large discrepancy
HYDROCORTISONE 309
HC=O c=o
I I
C-OH c=o
YT- IX
(minor)
IV
(major)
21 C H 2 0 H
IV
I (minor)
20 c=o
c=o
I
c=o
b'"
I11
I11
COOH
I (intermediate)
I
I
0 CHOH
+ y1 + others
C CHOH
VIII VI . ..OH
(major) (major) (minor) + others
CH20H CH20H
I I
c-0 c-0
68-Hydroxyhydrocortisone Cortisone
CH20H
l
Hydrocortisone
HO”
8
Hd
R-OH Tetrahydrocortisol; Allotetrahydrocortisol
R-0 Tetrahydrocortisonei Rllotetrahydrocortisona
CH20H
I OH HO&.
CHOH
’ __+
o*
HO‘ H HO’
li
20 o+R - Dihydrocortisol R-OH 20 o+B -- cortol 20 o+E -- allocortol
J R=O 20 a+B cortolone 20 a+B allocortolone
1
HO‘ @
116-Hydroxyetiocholanolone
+ HA .(y.p
;I
118-hydroxy androsterone
Gluconurides
Parenteral:
Blue Tetrazolium: 33
HPLC: 1 5 8
References
1. L.F. Fieser and M. Fieser, Steroids, Reinhold
Publishing Corporation ( 1 9 5 9 ) .
2. Modern Methods of Steroid Analysis,
E. Heftman, ed., Academic Press ( 1 9 7 3 ) .
3. I.S. G6rog and G . Sza'sz, Analysis of Steroid
Hormone Drugs, Elsevier ( 1 9 7 8 ) .
4. T. Reichstein, Helv. Chim. Acta, - 20, 9 5 3
(1937).
5. P.S. Hench, E.C. Kendall, C.H. Slocomb and
H.F. Polley, Proc. Staff Meetings, Mayo Clinic,
-
24, 1 8 1 (1949).
6. T. Reichstein and C.W. Shoppee, Vitamins and
Hormones, 1, 3 4 5 ( 1 9 4 3 ) .
7. N. L. Wendier, R.P. Graeber, R.E. Jones and
M. Tishler, J. Am. Chem. SOC., - 72, 5 7 9 3 ( 1 9 5 0 ) .
8. L.H. Sarett, J. Am. Chem. SOC., - 70, 1 4 5 4 (1948).
9. K. Florey, Chimia, 8, 8 1 ( 1 9 5 4 ) .
10. S.H. Eppstein, P.D.-Meister, H.C. Murray and
D.H. Peterson, Vitamins and Hormones XIV, 3 5 9 ,
Academic Press ( 1 9 5 6 ) .
11. M. Sittig, Pharmaceutical Manufacturing
Encyclopedia, Noyes Data Corp. ( 1 9 7 9 ) .
12. D. Riad-Fahmy, G. Read and I.A. Hughes,
Hormones in Blood, Vol. 3, p. 1 8 0 , C.H. Gray
and V.H.T. James, editors, Academic Press
(1979).
13. 0. Hechter and G . Pincus, Physiol. Rev., -
34,
459 (1954).
14. L.T. Samuels and T. Uchikawa in Adrenal Cortex,
p. 6 1 , Little, Brown and Co. , Boston ( 1 9 6 7 ) .
15. E. Ileftmann, Steroid Biochemistry, Academic
Press, New York ( 1 9 7 0 ) .
16. D.R. Collingsworth, I.N. Karnemaat,
F.R. Hanson, M.P. Brunner. 1 C . M . Mann and
W.J. Haines, J. Biol. Chem., - 203, 807 ( 1 9 5 3 ) .
17. A.M. Hayden, Anal. Chem., 27, 1 4 8 6 ( 1 9 5 5 ) .
18. K. Dobriner, E.R. Katzenellenbogen and
R.N. Jones, Infrared Absorption Spectra of
Steroids, Interscience, New York ( 1 9 5 3 ) .
19. R.J. Mesley, Spectrochimica Acta, - 22, 8 8 9
(1966).
316 KLAUS FLOREY
151.
152. J.C. Touchstone and W. Wortman, J. Chromatog.,
76, 244 (1973).
153. K K . Trefz, D.J. Bvrd and W. Kochen,
J. Chromatog., 107, 181 (1975).
154. J. Korpi, D.P. Wittman, B.J. Sandman,
W.G. Haney, Jr., J.Pharm.Sci., 65, 1087 (1976).
155. G. Schwedt, H.H. Bussemas and CTLippmann,
J. Chromatog., 143, 259 (1977).
156. D.C. Garg, J.W. Ayres and J.G. Wagner, Res.
Corn. in Chem. Pathol. and Pharmacol., 18,
137 (1977).
157. F.J. Frey, B.M. Frey and L.Z. Benet, Clin.
Chem., 25, 1944 (1979).
158. M.D. Smith and D.J. Hoffman, J. Chromat., - 168,
168 (1979).
159. J.R. Althaus, J.M. Rowland and J.P. Freeman,
J. Chromat., - 227, 11 (1982).
322 KLAUS FLOREY
1. Description 326
1.1 Introduction 326
1.2 Formula, Name, Formula Weight 326
1.3 Appearance, Color, Odor 326
2. Physical Properties 326
2.1 Ultraviolet Absorption Spectrum 326
2.2 Infrared Absorption Spectrum 328
2.3 Proton Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectrum 330
2.4 Carbon-13 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectrum 330
2.5 Mass Spectrum 334
2.6 Fluorescence Spectrum 334
2.7 Optical Rotation 337
2.8 Melting Range 337
2.9 Differential Scanning Calorimetry 337
2.10 Thermogravimetric Analysis 337
2.11 X-Ray Diffraction 337
2.12 Dissociation Constant 339
2.13 Solubility 339
2.14 Water Absorption Isotherm 339
2.15 Distribution Ratio 34 1
3. Synthesis 34 1
4. Stability 342
4.1 Solid State Stability 342
4.2 Solution Stability 342
5. Pharmacokineticsand Metabolism 342
6. Analytical Methods 343
6.1 Elemental Analysis 343
6.2 Nonaqueous Titration 343
6.3 Thin-Layer Chromatography 343
6.4 Gas Chromatography 346
6.5 Gas Chromatography-MassSpectrometry 349
6.6 High Pressure Liquid Chromatography 350
6.7 Ultraviolet Spectrophotometry 353
References 354
ANALYTICAL PROFILESOF DRUG SUBSTANCES 325 Copyright by ihe American Pharmaceutical AsSwafion.
VOLUME 12 ISBN 0- 12-260812-7
326 JAMES R.LUCH
1. Description
1.1 Introduction
Metoprolol tartrate is a synthetic, selective
beta 1-adrenoreceptor blocking agent ? - 3
1.2 Formula, Name, Formula Weight
OH
I
OCH2CHCH2NHCH(CH& COOH
I
H-C-OH
I
HO-C-H
I
COOH
2
Metoprolol tartrate
Formula Weight: 684.82 ( C I ~ H * ~ N O ~CqH6O6
)~
Chemical Abstracts Number: 56392-17-7
Metoprolol tartrate is a 2:1 salt consisting
of a racemic mixture of optical isomers of the
base and naturally occurring dex&o-tartaric acid.
The compound has been described by the following
chemical names.
i. 2-Propanol, 1-[ 4-(2-methoxyethyl)phenoxy]-3-
[ (1-methylethyl)amino]- , (+)- , [ R- (R* ,Rn) ] -
2,3-dihydroxybutanedioate (2:l)(salt)
ii. (+)-l-(Isopropylamino)-3-[p-(2-methoxyethyl)-
phenoxyl-2-propanol L-(+)-tartrate (2:l)(salt)
iii. 1-(1sopropylamino)-3- [p-(2-methoxyethyl)-
phenoxyl-2-propanol (2:l) dexho-tartrate salt
Trade Names: Betaloc, Lopresor, Lopressor, Seloken
1.3 Appearance, Color, Odor
Metoprolol tartrate is a white, virtually
odorless crystalline powder.
2. Physical Properties
2.1 Ultraviolet Absorption Spectrum
The ultraviolet absorption wavelength maxima
(Amax) and molar absorptivities ( E ) of metoprolol
tartrate in several solvents are listed in Table I.
A typical ultraviolet absorption spectrum of meto-
prolol tartrate in 0.1g HC1 obtained on a Hewlett-
Packard Model 8450A spectrophotometer is given in
Figure 1.
METOPROLOL TARTRATE 327
Wavelength (nm)
328 JAMES R. LUCH
TABLE I
Solvent
-1
Wavenumber (cm ) Assignment ( s )
oioo
OCH2CHCH2NHCH(CH&
mo o COOH
@
0 1 63
H-C-OH
* @
HO-C-H
I 0
0 0 @ I @
COOH
2
Proton Chemical Shift Number of Multiplicity
Positi o n 6 (ppm) Protons
1 1.33 12 Doublet
2 2.80 4 Triplet
3 3.13-3.31 6 Broad
4 3.32 6 Singlet
5 3.53 4 Triplet
6 3.95 4 Broad
7 4.40 4 Singlet & Broad
8 6.77 4 p-Substituted
Rromatic
9 7.07 4 p-Substituted
Aromatic
10 7.25 8 Broad,
Exchangeables
Figure 3: 80 MHz 'H Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectra of Metoprolol Tartrate
at Ambient Temperature (lower trace) and 60°C (upper trace)
332 JAMES R.LUCH
OH
0 I0 @ O 63
OCH2CHCH2NHCH(CH3)2 COOH
10
H-C-OH
I@
HO-C-H
@@ @ I
COOH
@CH2CH20CH3
63
Carbon Multi licity Without
Position 'H-decoupling
Without 'H-decoupling
With 'H-decoupling
1 1 1 I I I I 1 I I 1 1 1 I I I 1 1 I 1
180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0
PPM
334 JAMES R.LUCH
TABLE V
m/ e
252 [M - CH3]+
152
[ HO-o-CH2CH20CH3 ] +
OH
I
116 [CH2CHCH,NHCH(CH,) '
1
2
107
102 [HOCHCH*NHCH(CH3)2]+
77 C6H5+
72
+
CH2=NHCH(CH3)2
45 CH3-6=CH2
30 CH2=hH2
100
80
=.
.-
c
6o
v)
c
al
c
-
C
.-9
c
-mal
r-
40
20
MassKharge Ratio
1 250
Figure 6: Fluorescence Spectra of Metoprolol Tartrate
2 . 3 ~-. .-.
'O0I ---------- Water
Methanol 3.2~1O-~M I
80-
60-
40-
20-
-
I I I I 1 I I
270 290 310 330 350 370
Wavelength (nrn)
METOPROLOL TARTRATE 337
I I 1 I 1 I I
20 40 60 a0 100 120 140
1200
600
2.12 D i s s o c i a t i o n Constant
Dissociation constant data obtained f o r t h e
secondary amine of metoprolol t a r t r a t e by p o t e n t i o -
m e t r i c t i t r a t i o n a r e given i n Table V I . The pKa
v a l u e s r e p o r t e d i n The Merck Index8 f o r t a r t a r i c
a c i d a r e 2.93 and 4.23 a t 25OC.
TABLE V I
PG Conditions Reference
2.13 Solubility
The approximate s o l u b i l i t y of m e t o p r o l o l
t a r t r a t e i n s e v e r a l s o l v e n t s a t 25°C is g i v e n i n
Table V I I . The s o l u b i l i t y h a s been determined
a f t e r shaking a s a t u r a t e d suspension of t h e d r u g
f o r 2 hours.
Solvent S o l u b i l i t y (mg/ml)
Organic
Phase
Aqueous
Phase
Distribution
Ratio
I
Reference
3. Synthesis
/O\
OCHZCH-CH~
?H
HzNCH(CHs)z
342 JAMES R. LUCH
4. Stability
4.1 Solid State Stability
Metoprolol tartrate stored at room tempera-
ture and at 3 5 O C for five years is physically and
chemically stable. After storage at 5 O o C for up to
thirty months, no degradation has been observed--
the only change has been that the material became
slightly off-white; at lower temperatures and at
shorter time intervals at 5 O o C , it has been
completely unchanged in color. 9 Under high
humidity metoprolol tartrate is hygroscopic and
rapidly adsorbs water at relative humidities
greater than 7 0 % ; however, upon drying and
reanalysis, the material is found to have retained
its chemical and physical integrity.
6. Analytical Methods
6.1 Elemental Analysis
The elemental composition determined for a
typical' sample of metoprolo1 tartrate on a
Perkin-Elmer Model 240 CHN Analyzer is given
below.
System 1 1 ~ 1
Column: pBondapak c18 (30 cm x 3.9 mm
i.d. , Waters Associates)
Mobile Phase: A mixture of 520 ml methanol
and 480 ml water containing 1.10 g
1-heptanesulfonic acid sodium salt
(monohydrate) and 5.0 ml glacial
acetic acid
Flow Rate: 1.2 ml/minute
Detection: Ultraviolet absorption (274 nm)
Principle: Metoprolol tartrate is extracted
from feed samples with 0.1N HC1 con-
taining oxprenolol hydrochioride
(internal standard). Interfering
feed extractables are removed by
alkalizing the aqueous solution and
partitioning metoprolol into hexane-
methylene chloride ( 8 5 : 1 5 ) prior to
HPLC analysis.
METOPROLOL TARTRATE 351
42
System I11
Column: 15 cm x 4.5 m i.d. stainless steel
column packed with Partisil 10
(Whatman)
Mobile Phase: Methylene Chloride-Methanol-e
Diethylamine in Methanol (89:lO:l)
Flow Rate: 1 d/minute
Detection: Ultraviolet absorption (277 nm)
Principle: Metoprolol tartrate is extracted
from feed samples with 0.01E HC1,
the aqueous extract is made alkaline
and metoprolol is partitioned into
methylene chloride prior to HPLC
analysis.
43
System IV Metoprolol and one of its metabo-
lites (a-hydroxymetoprolol) have
been determined in plasma by the
following HPLC system.
Column: 25 cm x 4.6 nun i.d. stainless steel
column packed with 5 pm silica B/5
(Perkin-Elmer)
Mobile Phase: Hexane-Isopropanol-Methano1-
Concentrated Ammonium Hydroxide
(850:100:50: 1)
Flow Rate: 3 rdminute
Detection: Fluorescence, excitation wavelength
at 224 nm and no emission filter
Internal (+)-Ethyl-2- (4-(3-isopropylamino-
Standard : 2-hydroxypropoxy)phenyl)ethyl
carbamate
44
System V The following system based on ion-
pairing with a chiral counter ion,
(+)-10-camphorsulfonate, has been
used for the separation of meto-
prolol enantiomers.
Column: 10 cm x 3.2 mm i.d. or 15 cm x
3.2 mm i.d. stainless steel column
packed with 10 pm LiChrosorb-DIOL
(Merck)
352 JAMES R. LUCH
System V I I ~ The
~ following HPLC system has been
reported for the determination of
several beta-blocking agents,
including metoprolol, in plasma and
urine.
Column: pBondapak c18 column (30 cm x
3.9 mm i.d., Waters Associates)
Mobile Phase: Methanol-Water-Acetic Acid (50: 4 9 :1)
containing 1-heptanesulfonic acid,
prepared by adding one bottle of PIC
B-7 reagent (Waters Associates) per
liter of mobile phase
Flow Rate: 1.3 mllminute
Detection: Fluorescence, excitation wavelength
at 2 2 2 nm and no emission filter
METOPROLOL TARTRATE 353
Acknowledgment
The author expresses appreciation to Rebecca Yang, Donald
Kender, Jane Johnson and Richard Brown for their help in
preparing this manuscript and to Jijrgen Vessman for
reviewing the manuscript.
354 JAMES R. LUCH
References
1. Introduction 358
2. Description 358
2.1 Name, Formula, Molecular Mass 358
2.2 Trade Names 358
2.3 Appearance, Odour and Colour 359
3. Synthesis 359
4. Physical Properties 359
4.1 Solubility 359
4.2 Melting range 359
4.3 Specific Rotation 359
4.4 Crystal Structure 360
4.5 Dissociation Constant 360
4.6 Infrared Spectrum 360
4.7 Differential Scanning Calorimetry 362
4.8 Proton Magnetic Resonance Spectrum 362
4.9 Ultraviolet Spectrum 364
4.10 Mass Spectrum 365
5. Methods of Analysis 365
5.1 Elemental Analysis 365
5.2 Ultraviolet Spectrophotometric Analysis 365
5.3 Colorimetric Analysis 367
5.4 Spectrofluorimetric Analysis 367
5.5 Titrimetric Analysis 367
5.6 Chromatographic Analysis 368
6. Stability 37 1
7. Absorption, Disposition, and Pharmacokinetics 377
8. Identification and Determination in Biological Fluids 377
References 380
ANALYTiCAL PROFILES O F DRUG SUBSTANCES 357 Copyright by the Anierican PharnYlceutical Association.
VOLUME 12 ISBN 0-12-260812-7
358 ISADORE KANFER E T A .
1. Introduction
2. Description
H CH3
MM 187.67
C9H13No
a v a i l a b l e as a p p e t i t e s u p p r e s a n t s and c o l d and i n f l u e n z a
remedies.
3. Synthesis
Phenylpropanolamine h y d r o c h l o r i d e i s prepared by r e a c t i n g
benzaldehyde with n i t r o e t h a n e i n 95% e t h a n o l i n t h e p r e s e n c e
o f sodium hydroxide t o form a - ( 1 - n i t r o e t h y l l b e n z y l a l c o h o l
and t h e n r e d u c i n g t h i s n i t r o - a l c o h o l t o t h e corresponding
amino compound. A stream of hydrogen c h l o r i d e passed i n t o a
s u i t a b l e s o l u t i o n o f t h e base y i e l d s t h e h y d r o c h l o r i d e ( 5 ) .
4. Physical Properties
4.1 Solubility
4 -2 Melting r a n g e
Phenylpropanolamine h y d r o c h l o r i d e c r y s t a l s m e l t a t
190-194OC. The f r e e base m e l t s a t 101-101.5°C (6).
4.3 S p e c i f i c Rotation
4 .S Dissociation Constant
1990 NH3+
1623 NH3 out of plane deformation
1598 C=C aromatic stretching
1581 NH + out of plane deformation
1508, 1491 C=$ aromatic stretching
1450 0-H out of plane deformation
1329 NH3+ in plane deformation
1241 1208 0-H in plane deformation
1128, 1088, 1054 C-H in plane deformation,
monosubstituted benzene
1031 C-0 stretching
816, 802 NH3 + rocking
747, 703 C-H out of plane deformation,
monosubstituted benzene
Figure 1 . I n f r a r e d spectrum of phenylpropanolamine h y d r o c h l o r i d e i n Nujol mull.
362 ISADORE KANFER E T A .
I8
z
W
ii
Figure 3. Proton magnetic resonance spectrum of phenylpropanolamine in CDC13.
364 ISADORE KANFER ETAL.
e n t w i t h t h e p r o t o n assignments. Chemical s h i f t s ( 6 ) i n ppm
r e l a t i v e t o TMS are :
Proton Mmber Chemical
Wltiplicity
assignment of p r o t o n s J(Hz) S h i f t (6 )
- CH3 3 9.0 0.94 Lbublet
-NH2> -OH 3 - 2.07 Singlet
N-C-H 1 9.0 3.12 Quintuplet
0-C-H 1 9.0 4.51 Lbublet
Aromatic 5 - 7.41 Singlet
An i n s p e c t i o n of t h e D 0 exchange spectrum shows d i s a p p e a r -
2
ance of t h e resonance a t 2.07 ppm. This c o r r e s p o n d s t o
t h r e e p r o t o n s , one hydroxyl p r o t o n and two amino p r o t o n s .
4.9 U l t r a v i o l e t Spectrum
The u l t r a v i o l e t s p e c t r a of phenylpropanolamine
h y d r o c h l o r i d e i n methanol and 0.1M HC1 a t a c o n c e n t r a t i o n of
1 m g / m l w e r e o b t a i n e d w i t h a Eieckman Acta M V I u l t r a v i o l e t
spectrophotometer. "be spectrum i n methanol i s d e p i c t e d i n
Figure 4. The spectrum o b t a i n e d i n methanol shows s h o u l d e r s
1
I, .
Absorption
Solution E
M a x i m a (nm) -
Methanol 264.0 133.63
258.0 179.04
252.0 145.44
0.1M HC1 262.8 144.32
257.0 185.04
251 .O 148.82
The l o w r e s o l u t i o n m a s s spectrum of p h e n y l p r o p a n o l -
amine h y d r o c h l o r i d e i s shown i n F i g u r e 5. It w a s obtained
w i t h a V a r i a n MAT CH5-DF mass s p e c t r o m e t e r . Direct p r o b e a t
80°C i n t o t h e i o n s o u r c e w a s u s e d t o o b t a i n t h e mass s p e c t r u m
The m o l e c u l a r i o n i s n o t o b s e r v e d . The a s s i g n m e n t s of some
of t h e major i o n s formed are :
m/e -
r
-
Ion
+
132 17 Ph-CH=C ( CH ) NH
2 2
105 29 Ph-C=O+
91 26 Ph-CH2+
77 100 Ph+
5. Methods of A n a l y s i s
5.1 Elemental A n a l y s i s
Theory ( % )
Element Hydrochloride -
Base
C 57.62 70.61
H 7.47 9.80
N 18.92 9.15
0 7 -46 10.44
c1 8.52 -
P e r i o d a t e o x i d a t i o n of phenylpropanolamine hydro-
c h l o r i d e h a s been used. The sample t o be d e t e r m i n e d i s
p l a c e d i n a s e p a r a t o r y f u n n e l , sodium b i c a r b o n a t e and sodium
m e t a p e r i o d a t e are added and a f t e r s t a n d i n g fsr a b o u t 1 5 min-
u t e s t h e s o l u t i o n i s e x t r a c t e d w i t h hexane a f t e r t h e a d d i t i o n
of 1 M h y d r o c h l o r i c acid. The e x t r a c t i s f i l t e r e d and t h e
Figure 5. Mass spectrum of phenylpropanolamine hydrochloride.
PHENYLPROPANOLAMINEHYDROCHLORIDE 367
5.3 C o l o r i m e t r i c Analysis
Phenylpropanolamine h y d r o c h l o r i d e can be r e a c t e d
w i t h ninhydrin i n a c i t r a t e b u f f e r a t an e l e v a t e d tempera-
t u r e and determined c o l o r i m e t r i c a l l y a t 570nm ( 1 5 ) . This
r e a c t i o n h a s been a p p l i e d t o t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n of phenylpro-
panolamine h y d r o c h l o r i d e i n a multicomponent m i x t u r e by an
automated system which, a f t e r phase s e p a r a t i o n , u t i l i z e s t h e
stream s p l i t t i n g t e c h n i q u e t o d i v i d e t h e c h l o r o f o m stream
i n t o segments ( 1 6 ) . An i o n - p a i r e x t r a c t i o n t e c h n i q u e u s i n g
an a c i d i c d y e , bromothymol b l u e , has been u t i l i z e d and t h e
r e s u l t i n g chloroform e x t r a c t determined a t 420x1111 ( 1 7 ) .
5.4 S p e c t r o f l u o r i m e t r i c Analysis
5.5 T i t r i m e t r i c Analysis
2,6-dinitro-4-trif~uoromethy~benzenesu~phonicacid derivat-
ives. The gas chromatographic conditions are listed in Table
2.
6. Stabilitv
mug Injected
COlUmn Carrier R (mins) Detector as Ref
Source Gas Tkn~p(~C) T
Raw 1.8m x 2mm (i-d.1
N2
250 1.38 EC ,,
2 64 in i t r o - 45
Material glass 4 - t r i f luoro-
3% OV-1 on Supelcoport methyl-benzene-
0.9m x 2mm (i.d.1 220 1.38 sulphonic acid
glass derivative
3% SP-2250 on Supel- 230 0.98
coport
Raw 1.2m x 4mm (i.d.1 glass 185 1.60 FID Phenylpropan- 46
N2
Materia1 2% SE-30 and 2% o lamine hydro-
Carbowax 20M on chloride
-a
W Anachrom ABS
P
Raw 1.8m x 2 m g l a s s He -0- 8.36 Nitrogen Phenylpropan- 47
Material 3% OV-17 on Anachrom grammed olamine
ABS 100-250
Bio- 1 .Om x 6mm (o.d.1 FID Phenylpropan- 33
N2
logical glass olamine
Material 7.5% Carbowax 20M on 165 4.10
Chromosorb W
2.0% Carbowax 20M on 120 1-10
Chromosorb G
Wine 1 .lm x 3mm (i.d. g l a s s He 170 Not Nitrogen Phenylpropan- 34
12.5% Apiezon L on reported olamine
Chromosorb W impregnat-
ed with 2 % Igepal CO 880
TABLE 3
HIGH PERFORMANCE L I Q U I D CHROMATOGRAPHIC SYSTEMS FOR PHENYLPROPANOLAMINE
mug Flow r a t e
Mobile Phase R (mins) Detection Ref
Source
COlUmn
(ml/min) T -
Urine 0.3m x 3.9mm (i.d.1 Methanol/water/acetic 2 .o 8.2 254nm 53
Waters p b n d a p a k C18 acid (45 :54 :1
0.3m x 3,9m (i.d.1 Methanol/water (60 :40 1 1 .o 7.4 254nrn 54
Waters UEbndapak w i t h 0.004M sodium
phenyl h e p t a n e s u l p h o n a t e and
Waters VBondapak (38 1 % acetic acid 1 .o 11.7
Urine 0.25111 x 2mm (i.d.1 Chloroform/ethyl 1.2 9.9 450nm 55
Lichrosorb S I 100 acetate/ethanol/
and Wakogel LC 5H n-hexane ( 2 5 :10 :1 :50)
Plasma LDC 51J O D s 40% a c e t o n i t r i l e i n 1.8 8.2 Fluorescence 56
w a t e r containing detection
ammonium acetate and
acetic acid
Serum a 0.3m x 3.9mm (i.d.1 Acetonit r i l e / w a t e r 1.3 4.8 220nm 57
urine Waters pEbndapak C18 (25:75) w i t h 0.005M
sodium h e p t a n e s u l -
p h o n a t e and 0 - 2 % 1 M
HC1
0.15m x 4.6mm (i.d.1 0.1M KH PO i n 1 0 % 1 .o 5.4 198nm 58
2 4
S p h e r i s o r b S5W aqueous e t h a n o l
PHENY LPROPANOLAMINE HYDROCHLORIDE 377
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
INJECT
INJECT
INJECT
f
9p'
5:
( a ) HPLC chromatogram of blank serum e x t r a c t . (a) HPLC chromatogram of blank u r i n e e x t r a c t .
'd
8
n
r
x
r
P,
2a
(b) HPLC chromatogram of serum e x t r a c t ( b ) HPLC chromatogram of u r i n e e x t r a c t
c o n t a i n i n g phenylpropanolamine ( 1 1 c o n t a i n i n g phenylpropanolamine ( 1 )
and ephedrine (2). and ephedrine ( 2 ) .
380 ISADORE KANFER ETAL.
REFERENCES
7. ,
H. E. Smith , E. P. Burrows , J. D. Miano C. D. h u n t ,
E. Sander-Bush and F. Sulser, J. Med. Chem. 416 , 17,
( 1 974 1.
62. ,
M. E. Wolfe "Burger I s Medicinal Chemistry", John Wiley
and Sons Inc. (Canada), 4 t h Ed., P a r t 1 , 1980, p. 202.
This p r o f i l e attempts t o c o v e r t h e p u b l i s h e d l i t e r a t u r e o n
phenylpropanolamine h y d r o c h l o r i d e u p t o J u l y 1982.
PILOCARPINE
Abdullah A . Al-Badr and Hassan Y. Aboul-Enein
1. Description 386
I . 1 Nomenclature 386
1.2 Formulae 386
1.3 Molecular Weight 387
1.4 Elemental Composition 387
1.5 Appearance, Odor, and Color 387
2. Physical Properties 387
2.1 Melting points 387
2.2 pK.value 388
2.3 Specific Rotation 388
2.4 Crystal Structure 388
2.5 Identification 388
2.6 Stability 392
2.7 Spectral Properties 394
3. Synthesis 402
4. Biosynthesis 408
5. Metabolism 41 1
6. Methods of Analysis 41 I
6.1 Titrimetric Methods 41 1
6.2 Polarographic Analysis 413
6.3 Gravimetric Analysis 414
6.4 Polarimetric Analysis 414
6.5 Phase-Solubility Analysis 414
6.6 Fluorescence Analysis 415
6.7 Spectrophotometric Analysis 415
6.8 Chromatographic Analysis 42 1
6.9 IT-NMR Quantitative Analysis 425
6.10 Thermofractographic Analysis 426
References 427
PILOCARPINE
1. Description
1.1 Nomenclature
1.11 Chemical names
-
2-Ethy1-3 [ 1-methy l-5- imidazo1y1) methy1] -4-buta-
nolide.
(3s-cis)-3-Ethyldihydro-4- [ (-methyl-1H-imidazole-
5-yl) methyl]-2-( 3H)-furanone.
(3s ,4R)-3-Ethyl dihydro-4-[ (1-methyl-1H-imidazol-
5-yl) methyl] furan-2 (3H)-one.
Pilocarpine.
Pilocarpine hydrochloride; pilocarpine muriate;
almocarpine .
Pilocarpine nitrate; Licarpin.
[ 92-13-71 (base).
[54-71-71 (HC1 salt).
[ 148-7241 (nitrate salt).
1.2 Formulae
1.21 Empirical
C11H16N202 (base).
C H C1N202 (HC1 salt).
11 17
C11H17N305 (nitrate salt).
PILOCARPINE 387
1.22 Structural
208.25 (base).
244.72 (HC1 salt).
271.30 (nitrate salt).
b) Pilocarpine hydrochloride
c) rilocarpine nitrate
2. Physical Properties
Pilocarpine base.
Pilocarpine hydrochloride.
Pilocarpine nitrate.
2.4 C r y s t a l Structure
a) Pilocarpine hydrochloride
Figure 1. XZ P r o j e c t i o n of h a l f a u n i t c e l l i n d i c a t i n g
packing and hydrogen bond scheme. (3)
of H 0 s o l u t i o n (20 v o l . ) , 1 m l t o l u e n e and
2 2
0.5 m l of potassium chromate s o l u t i o n . Shake
w e l l and a l l o w t o s e p a r a t e ; The t o l u e n e l a y e r
i s c o l o r e d b l u i s h v i o l e t and t h e aqueous l a y e r
remains yellow.
b) Pilocarpine n i t r a t e .
2.52 C r y s t a l t e s t
a ) Gold bromide s o l u t i o n ; f e a t h e r i n g r o s e t t e s
( s e n s i t i v i t y 1 i n 1500).
b ) P l a t e n i c c h l o r i d e solution;' p l a t e s i n c l u s t e r .
( s e n s i t i v i t y 1 i n 1500).
392 ABDULLAH A. AL-BADR AND HASSAN Y. ABOUL-ENEIN
2.6 Stabilitv
OH-/H~O
3OoC
pH:> 8 H H
H20
R
i 300c
H5C2 H
C 2 H 5 X o H / y R
’O 0
28% 28%
OH- pH > 8
C2H5
I
eR 44%
v
1
u
0-
72% 28%
Neville --
et a1 (20) studied the stereoselective em-
pimerization of pilocarpine to isopilocarpine as
well as the hydrolysis of the parent compound(s) t o
form the o en chain pilocarpinate (isopilocarpi-
nate) by NMR spectroscopy. The mechanism for
the empimerization of pilocarpine and the non-
epimerization of isopilocarpine was discussed and
rationalized. The basis for the assay of the de-
gradation products for aqueous pilocarpine solution
was based on the use of the differences for the CH2
group adjacent to the oxygen lactone ether.
100.0
50.0
.-
ml e Ion
208 M+
95 (C)
3. Synthesis
Several syntheses of pilocarpine have been reported in the
literature. The total synthesis of pilocarpine was first
reported by Preobrashenski et a1 (22-31).
COOEt
I 1 ) D i e t h y l malonate
COOEt
CH
Michael a d d i t i o n
-
I - 1
-
II b Et C CHCOOEt
CH 2)Ethylation. I I
EtOOC CH20Et
I
CH20Et
X
0
0
4-Ethoxy C r o t o n a t e . V
zN
t 2)
1) Hydrolysis
Decarboxylat i o n . *
HOO 0
8
-
Cis-conf i g u r a t i o n used. Racemic
mixture.
O C H O I____t EtO
-
17 18
-
fOOEt H
4 CH2COOEt
I c
I--, COOEt
Et
19
COOEt
1 ) Catalytic hydrogena-
CH
1
- co *HZ '@ 2) Hydrdysis
Racemic 8
t ion
0
I
I 21
hyd z ly s i s
(+>
J- g
Prebradhenski et a1
route.
(+>
J
- Pilocarpine.
I
-
22
23
- 16
-
Scheme 4 . Chumachenko et a1 route f o r the Synthesis
of pilocarpine (33-35).
PILOCARPINE 407
HBr 'fi
0
Goo%
1) Catalytic
kydrogenatiof
of mellglester
Racemic
g+
0 2) Hydrolysis.
C = H g
-
R = CH3 25
CH2COC1
Resolution
*(+I -8 Sod. salt of
'.
ditert-butyl 3
acetamido-
U
malonat e.
COOC (CH3)
I
E H C H 2 -CO - C - NHCOCH3
* 0
I
COOC (CH3) 1) Hydrolys
4
2) Decarboxy-
lat ion.
26
-
Preobrashenski route
)L (+) - pilocarpine.
R EtOOC, H
Diethyl succinate
KOC (CH3)3
Stobbe condensation.
COO
- K+
R = COO CH
3
= CHO
1. Reduction
2 . Hydrolysis Catalytic
3. Hydrogenation
0
(*)-Pilosfnine
H H
CH OC
1) Reduction
2 ) Acetylation 3
3) Elimination
(+) - P i l o c a r p i n e and
C a t a l y t i c (+)-Isopilocarpine
0
Reduct ion' (97 : 3 )
N
__
H
N2H- t: AH Walden inversion
I n >
COOH through several steps
L. Histidine
H
CgHgCH2OOC I
I
Et- c-
I
CgHgCH2OOC
(+) -Pilocarpine
1) Reduction (+) -1sopilocarpine
w
2) Hydrogeration ( 4 5 : 55)
3) Lactonigation.
--
6.1 Titrimetric methods
412 ABDULLAH A. AL-BADR AND HASSAN Y.ABOUL-ENEIN
CH3-
I/
c
\
7 2 + Pathway 1
'i
HO-
HO
H
1
CH3-CHZ\
c = o +
HC
o = cI
\
=\ CNN> Pathway 2 1
/ OH
HO- C
CH3CH2\
t-+"O--"
' I
"0
c=c --.CH
CH20H CN6 = NH
pilocarpine
b) Pilocarpine iiitrate:
This salt is assyed in USP XX (2) and B.P.
1980 (48) by non aqueous titration with 0.1N
perchloric acid. The end point is determined
potentiometrically.
6.12 Conductimetric titration:
Jarzebinski and Suchocki (49) reported a method
for determination of pilocarpine hydrochloride
among other hydrochlorides of several alkaloids
by direct-conductimetric titration with 0.01N or
0.005N NaOH in aqueous ethanol medium.
6 . 7 4 Colorimetric Analysis
Acid form of Rosebengal, the color 550 rim. Excess saturated aq. lithium carbo- (71)
extracted with chloroform. nate solution i s added to affect
displacement o f pilocarpine from
thesolution during the color forma-
tion and extraction of the complex.
Methyl orange, extracting the 420 nm. The assay is unaffected by the anti- ( 7 2 )
complex at pH 4.5 with chloroform. oxidants, preservatives of non-
alkaloid component. The method is
applied to pilocarpine, physostigmine
P
r
and mixture of the two alkaloids in
m eye drops and ointments.
Citrate buffer pH 6 . 8 t 0 . 3 % sodium 520 nm. Calibration curve is required, the ( 7 3 )
aqua or aminopentacyanoferrate coefficient of variation 1.8%.
solution, heat at 45OC for 3 The color intensity is maximum at
hours, cool. pH 5-7 and borate buffer solution
can be used but not acetate OK
phosphate buffer solutions.
0.6 M NaOH+O.lM sod. pentacyano- 520 nm. Coeficient variation is 7.3%. (74)
nitrosylferrate, set aside for one Boric acid present in ophthalmic
hour in the dark, add 0.6M acetic solution does not interfere.
acid (the pH should be about 7 ) .
Set aside for 50 minutes.
contd.......
Wavelength or Ref.
Reagent used to produce color. Comment.
color produced.
The formaldehyde produced by heat- 545 nm. The method is recommended where (75)
ing pilocarpine with benzyl per- ingredients interfere in the
oxide is determined colorimetri- hydroxylamine HC1 method.
cally with chromotropic acid. Eserine must be separated by
TLC prior to the analysis.
3% Ammonium reineckate solution Pink violet comp- The composition of the complex (76)
in acetone. lex measured at has been verified.
533 nm.
Can be applied to several (77)
5
\o
Molybdophosphoric acid. The con- 750 nm. organic bases mainly
tent of Movl in the ppt formed
alkaloids.
is determined colorimetrically
after dissolution and reduction
to molybdenium blue and excess
reagent is masked with tartrate.
2,4-dinitrophenyl acetate method. 357 nm at The base should be extracted with (78)
This depends on catalytic action pH 7.45. CHC13 (to exclude pilocarpic acid
of the imidazole portion of pilo- which interfere with the determi-
carpine on the hydrolysis 2,4- nation). The presence of NaCl
dinitrophenyl acetate. increases the rate of hydrolysis
of the reagent, peroxide, hydro-
xylamine and other nucleophiles
do interfere with the assay.
contd.....
Wavelength or Comment. Ref.
Reagent used to produce color. color produced.
The differential acid dye 420 nm. Applied to pilocarpine and other
method. drugs. Blank solution is
Pot. acid phthalate buffer, needed. The author claims the (80)
pH 4 . 2 , 0.05% methyl orange use of this method to assay
solution in aqueous ethanol. pilocarpine in biological fluids.
The color produced extrac-
ted with chloroform.
PILOCARPINE 42 1
Niezgodzki --
et a1 (81) described an analytical
method for the determination of several alkaloids
including pilocarpine in injections by means of
cationic paper (0.3 inch thick) and measured the
spot areas planimetrically. The method can
detect 0.2 mg of pilocarpine HC1 with i 2.06%
standard deviation.
et -
Bayne - a1 (86) and Dziedzic et a1 (87) reported
similar methods for the determination of pilocar-
pine in biological fluids (aq. humour of rabbit
cornea) in sub u g quantities. Both methods had
derivatized pilocarpine (after extraction from the
biological fluid) with heptafluorobutric anhydride.
The derivatized pilocarpine was then introduced
to the gas chromatogram under the following con-
ditions:-
a) Silanized glass column (6ft x 2mm) containing
3% OV-17 Chromosob W (100-120 mesh) at 190°,
with N2 as gas carrier (25 ml/min) and 3H-elec-
tron-capture detector (86).
Table 3
VBondapack c18 40% methanol with 0.005 1 ml/min. W 235 nm. Applied for analysis of (95)
M heptane sulfonic pilocarpine physostig-
acid solution pH 3.6 mine, rubreserine, de-
gradation products and
preservatives in ophth-
almic solution detection
limit 0.003 ug.
VBondapack c18 1M mole sodium octane- 1.6 m l / W 254 nm. Detection limit less than (96)
1-sulphonate in min . 3.8 ng in the presence of
ethanol: water, (4:l). isopilocarpine.
Applied for analysis in
aq. humour.
Derivatization by quater-
ization with a-bromo-4-nitro-
toluene is required for
analysis.
PILOCARPINE 425
6.10Thermofractographic Analysis
REFERENCES
13. P.H. Chung, T.F. Chin and J.L. Lach, J. Pharm. Sci., 2,
1300 (1970).
38. H. Link and K. Bernauer, Helv. Chim. Acta 55, 1053 (1972).
68. R.E. Natori and T. Baker, 2. Pharm. Sci., 61, 244 (1972).
74. M.S. Karawya and M.G. Ghourab, 2. Ass. Off Analyt Chem.
55, 1180 (1972).
-
75. G. Teodorescu, Revue roum. Chim., 19,1645 (1974).
79. M.A. El-Sayed and J.C. Ike, Pharmazie, 33, 612 (1978).
86. W.F. Bayne, L.C. Chu and F.T. Tao, J. Pharm. Sci., 65,
1724 (1976).
87. S.W. Dziedzic, S.E. Gitlow and D.L. Krohn, J. Pharm. Sci.
65, 1262 (1976).
97. G.A. Neville, F.B. Hasan and I.C.P. Smith, J. Pharm. Sci.
66, 638 (1977).
-
98. E. Stahl and W. Schmitt, Aroch. Pharm. Weinheim, 308,
570 (1975).
Acknowledgement
ANALYTICAL PROFILES OF DRUG SUBSTANCES 433 Copyright by the American Pharmaceutical Associalinn.
VOLUME 12 ISBN 0-12-260812-7
434 ERNST FELDER AND DAVIDE PITRE
Only in 1952 Kuschner et a1.(4) and Malone (5), starting from the ob-
servation that Nicotinamide showed some antitubercular activity, re-
cognized the antitubercular activity of the isosteric Pyrazinamide in
experimental mouse tuberculosis. Subsequently it was found to be clini-
cally active in humans (Minutes of the llthe Conf. on Chemoth. o f Tu-
berc.). The drug was Introduced in primary chemotherapy of tuberculosis
in the early 1950's.
Whereas toxicity was a major problem with high daily dosages given for
long periods this was not the case with moderate daily dosage.
2. Description
2.1 Nomenclature
Pyrazinecarboxamide; Pyrazine-2-carboxamide
CAS: 98-96-4
Pyrazi namide
Mol. w t . = 123.11
C5H5N30
Wiswesser l i n e notation: T6N DNJ BVZ
3. Physical Properties
3.1 Spectra
3.1.1 I n f r a r e d Spectrum
Table I
Table 2
3.1.2.2 "C-NMR
Table 3
Sc (Ppm) TMS -
Line Intensity Assignment
165.0 1 40 c=o
147.3 2 129 C-6
145.0 3 35 c-2
143.6 4 99 c-3
143.2 5 107 c-5
40 6-12 - DMSO
0.0 13 TMS
The assignments o f t h e three carbons C-3, C-4, C-5 are made on the basis
o f s e l e c t i v e decoupling.
CONH~+
(CH~NO)+
T
(C5 H5 N5 O)+
Mt m/e 123 (96%)
I
m/e 80 (100%)
-HCN
m/e 79 (25%)
1
. .
-HCN
3.1.4 UV Spectra
Table 5
- .......................
Instrumental conditions
TUBE: Cu 50 KV, 30 mA; FILTER Ni;3SLITS lo-0.1-lo; DETECTOR Proportio-
nal t Discriminator; SCALE 1 x 10 cps; SCANNING SPEED 1/4O 20 X min;
PAPER SPEED 300 mm/h; TIME CONSTANT 2 sec.; SPECIMEN HOLDER: Niskanen +
I n t e r n a l Standard.
PYRAZINAMIDE 445
Table 6
I/I, xlOOxx
11.20 80 3.02 3
6.42 17 2.89 3
5.76 53 2.83 4
5.64 82 2.79 4
5.01 100 2.51 16
4.32 7 2.43 3
3.76 9 2.35 4
3.65 13 2.26 15
3.37 40 2.16 2
3.28 12 2.14 3
3.25 65
3.21 30
plus other l i n e s 1
3.07 6
x i n t e r p l a n a r distances = nA / 2 s i n 8 = 1.54051 A
3.2.3 M e l t i n g Point
3.2.4 D.T.A.
3.3 Solubi 1i t y
Table 7
(C6H5N30)2
M = CO x = 2c1
M = Co X = 26r
M = co x = 21
M Co x = 2C1O4
M = co X = 2N03 H20
M = CO X = 2SCN
M = CO x = so4
M = Cu x = 2C1O4
ERNST FELDER AND DAVIDE PIT&
M = CU X = 2CH3CO0 (47)
M = Hg X = 2N03 (48)
M = Hg X = ZCH3CO0 (47)
M = Fe x = so4 (52)
M = Pd x = 2c1 (49)
M = Pt x = 2c1 (49)
M = Mn X = ZCH3CO0 (47)
M = Ni X = 2CH3CO0 (47)
M = Ni x = 2c1 (40)
M = Ni X = 2Br (40)
M = Ni x = 21 (40)
M = Ni x = 2C1O4 (40)
M = Ni X = 2SCN (40)
M = Zn x = 2c1 (45)
-T
I1
0
11
CL
I =
u- u
+ ma=
v)
N I N
N T u v
E S Z
O Z N II II-
O I I
u-u-u p : p :
450 ERNST FELDER AND DAVIDE PITRE
pyrazinoic acid 111, the key intermediate, can also be prepared by con-
densation of 2,3-diaminopropionic acid VII with glyoxal, followed by
oxidation with air (59). Oxidation of methylpyrazine VIIIa with sele-
nious acid in pyridine or of ethylpyrazine VIIIb with potassium perman-
ganate are further alternatives for preparation of I11 (60).
Ammonoxidation of methylpyrazine VIIIa yields 2-cyanpyrazine IX (61),
which is easily converted to Pyrazinamide (62).
6. Stabi 1 i ty
7.1 Metabol i sm
In human urine two other metabolites are also excreted in minor quanti-
ties; one of them was "tentatively assigned" as pyrazinuric acid (66).
The following table outlines the metabolism scheme and the related en-
zymes
Table 9
/N
___,
Pyrazinamide Xantine
deamidase
I Oxidase
Glyci ne conjugation
+
Tentatively assigned
PYRAZINAMIDE 451
7.2 Pharmacokinetics
Table 10
1 g 2 45 15 y/ml 70
after 15 h
1 g 1 - 3 50 - 60 30-40 /ml 71
after 12 h
1.5 g 2 32 half life 64
9-10 h
3 g 2 65 - 64
3 9 1 - 2 134-125 - 67
20 mg/kg 1 - 4 65 5-20 x/ml 72
after 12 h
25 mg/kg 2 47 - 75
35 mg/kg 1 - 3 40 - 80 half life 74
9 h
-
452 ERNST FELDER AND DAVIDE PITRk
7.3 Protein b i n d i n g
7.4 Acute t o x i c i t y
9. Methods of Analysis
9.1 Elemental
9.8 Chromatography
e) n-Butanol - HC1 1N ( 1 : l )
1) UV l i g h t
2) Potassium permanganate spray reagent (1% aqueous sol .)
3) Iodoplatinate spray reagent
4) Water s o l u t i o n o f 4% nitroprusside and NaOH 4N (1:l)
PYRAZINAMIDE 455
Table 1 1
Solvent system -
Plate Rf
- Reference
I A 0.63 19
I1 B 0.26 73
I11 B 0.44 73
IV B 0.79 73
V B 0.76 73
VI B 0.48 57
VII C -- 70
Solvent System:
A Silica gel G
B Kieselgel 60F 254 (Merck)
C A1203 60F 254 (Merck)
Detection systems:
-
GLC of Pyrazinamide with lithium iodide containing poly-(ethylene gly-
col) as stationary phase was reported (84).
456 ERNST FELDER AND DAVIDE PITRB
- Apparatus: Hewlett-Packard 10
- Column : 25 cm X 4 mm’!abiH column packed with Lichrosorb RP8
(7
- Injection: 20 I1 o f aqueous solution (about 10 mg/ml o f Pyrazinamide)
- Eluent A : iqueous 0.005 M tetrabutylammonium phosphate (pH 7.5)
- Eluent B : 0.005 M tetrabutylammonium phosphate in than01 - water
8:2 (v/v)
- Flow rate : 1.5 ml/min
- Gradient profile:
Minutes % Eluent 8
0 5
2 5
10 45
11 45
13 5 (reconditioning step)
18 stop
- Column temperature: 25’C
- Detector wavelenght: 254 nm
- Relative retention time: pyrazinoic acid: 1.9 min.
Pyrazinamide: 1 min.
9.9 Counter Current Distribution
- -
For pyrazinoic acid the distribution is possible with the solvent system
ethyl acetate 0.01N sulfuric acid ( K 0.44 5 0.01).
11. REFERENCES
5. L. Malone e t al., -
Rev.Tuber. 65, 511 (1952)
15. Jap. P. I X
16. B.P. 1980: Monographs: Pyrazinamide Vol. 1, pag. 379
65. I.M. Weiner, J. Tinker, J.Pharm. & Exper.Therap. 180, 411 (1972)
1. Description 464
1 . 1 Nomenclature 464
1.2 Formulae 464
1.3 Molecular Weight 465
1.4 Elemental Composition 465
1.5 Appearance, Colour, Odour, and Taste 465
1.6 Dissociation Constant 465
2. Physical Properties 465
2.1 Melting Point 465
2.2 Solubility 465
2.3 Identification 465
2.4 Spectral Properties 466
3. Synthesis 47 1
4. Metabolism and Pharmacokinetics 474
5. Methods of Analysis 474
5.1 Gravimetric Method 474
5.2 Titrirnetric Method 475
5.3 Chromatography 475
5.4 Spectrophotometric Analysis 477
5.5 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance 478
References 479
ANALYTICAL PROFILES OF DRUG SUBSTANCES 463 Capynghl by [he American Pharmaceutical Association
VOLUME 12 lSRN0-12~260812-7
464 MOHAMMED A. LOUTFY AND HASSAN Y. ABOUL-ENEIN
1. Description
1.1. Nomenclature
1.1.1. Chemical Names
5- (4-Chlorophenyl)-6-ethyl-2,4-pyrimidine-
diamine (1);
2,4-Diamino-5-(p-chlorophenyl)-6-ethylpyrimi-
dine ( 2 ) ;
5-(4-Chlorophenyl)-6-ethylp yrimidine-2,4-
diamine (3,4) ;
2,4-Pyrimidinediamine, 5-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-
ethyl (5).
C12H13C1N4 '
1.2.2. Structural
c1 (0
NHZ
PYRIMETHAMINE 465
T6NCNJ BZ D
Z ER DC and F2 (6).
58-14-0 (6).
248.71
2.2. Solubility
2.3. Tdentffication
Microcrystal Tests
90. -90
80. - 80
70. - 70
60. - 60
50. - 50
40. -40
30. .30
2 0. - 20
10- - 10
1 .
W a v e Leng t h
Fig. 1. W SPECTRUM OF PYRIMETHAMINE IN 0.005 N HC1.
90. - 90
80. - 80
70. - 70
60. - 60
50- - 50
40- - 40
30- . 30
20- .20
10- . 10
468 MOHAMMED A. LOUTFY AND HASSAN Y.ABOUL-ENEIN
34403
3310
NH asymmetric and symmet-
2 stretch.
ric
8101
750
C-H out of plane bending
vibration.
-
N(1) N(3) -
N(2) N(4) Solvent
-176.3 -176.3 -300.9 -299.4 a
-247.5 -247.5 -294.5 -274.9 b
-249.9 -250.7 -295.8 -274.5
-----------------c--__c_________________-------
C
a=dimethyl sulphoxide at 6
0
'.
b=trifluoroacetic acid.
c-fluorosulphonic acid.
472 MOHAMMED A. LOUTFY AND HASSAN Y. ABOUL-ENEIN
I R=iso-C H
5 11;
=C2H5 ;
=CH3
/ NH2 :2H5
HN=C-
‘ NH,
p-ClC H
H2‘@ANH2
Scheme 1
b. Logemann e t a l . ( 9 ) have p r e p a r e d t h e drug by h e a t i n g
a-propionyl-p-chlorophenyl a c e t o n i t r i l e (I) w i t h
a n i l i n e and t r e a t i n g t h e p r o d u c t w i t h t h e c a l c u l a t e d
amount of N a / C H OH and c y c l i z i n g w i t h g u a n i d i n e
2 5
(Scheme 2 ) .
PhNH2
I T> NC-HC-C6H4C1
I
(p-) Enolisation ,
I \
PhN=C-C2H5
NC-C-C6H4C1 (p->
II
Ph-HN-C-C 2H5
HN=C (NH2)
Pyrimethamine
Scheme 2
PYRIMETHAMINE 475
L
1) Chlorination
2) NH3
> Pyrimethamine
Scheme 3
5. Methods of Analysis
Non-aqueous
5.3. Chromatography
5 . 3 . 3 . Gas-Liquid ChromatograDhy
5.4.1. Colorimetric
5.4.2. Ultraviolet
6. References
30. R.M. Jacob, Fr, 1, 070, 420, July 26, 1954; through
Chem. Abstr. 53,-43=(1=).
I
482 MOHAMMED A. LOUTFY AND HASSAN Y.ABOUL-ENEIN
1. Description 484
1.1 Nomenclature 484
1.2 Formulae 484
1.3 Molecular Weight 489
1.4 Elemental Composition 489
1.5 Appearance, Color, Odor, and Taste 489
2. Physical Properties 489
2.1 Melting Range 489
2.2 Eutectic Temperature 489
2.3 Solubility 489
2.4 Dissociation Constant 489
2.5 Specific Rotation 490
2.6 Loss on Drying 490
2.7 pHRange 490
2.8 Spectral Properties 490
3. Preparation of Quinidine Sulfate 50 1
3.1 Isolation of Quinidine 50 1
3.2 Quinidine Sulfate 503
4. Synthesisof Quinidine 503
4. I Partial Synthesis 503
4.2 Total Synthesis 503
5. Biosynthesis of Quinidine 512
6. Metabolism 515
7. Phannacokinetics 516
8. Routes of Administration, Dosage, and Preparations 517
9. Methods of Analysis 518
9.1 Identification 518
9.2 Gravimetric Method 5 19
9.3 Titrimetric Methods 5 19
9.4 Chromatography 523
9.5 Spectrophotometry 531
References 536
ANALYTICAL PROFILES OF DRUG SUBSTANCES 483 Copyrightby the American Phamcevrical Association.
VOLUME I2 ISBN 0-12-260812-7
484 MOHAMMED A. LOUTFY ETAL..
1. Description
1.1. Nomenclature
a - ( 6-methoxy-4-quinolyl)-5-vinyl-2-
quinuclidine methanol , sulfate (2:l)
salt, dihydrate.
6-methoxy-a- (5-vinyl-2-quinucli-
dinyl) -4-quinolinemethanol , sulfate
(2:l) salt, dihydrate.
( S ) - CL -(6-methoxy-quinolin-4-yl)-a -
[ (2R,4S,5R)-( 5-vinylquinuclidin-2-yl)l-
methanol, sulfate (2:l) salt , dihy-
drate.
1.2. Formulae
1.2.1 Fmpirical
(C H N 0 ) H2S04 2H20
20 24 2 2 2'
C40H54N4010S
QUINIDINE SULFATE
1.2.2 Structural
1.2.5 Stereochemistry
I f Q r e p r e s e n t s t h e quinoline h a l f ,
t h e s t r u c t u r e of quinidine may be
w r i t t e n a s follows:-
Conclusive evidence f o r t h e c i s
arrangement a t C3 and C 4 w a s provided
by Prelog and Zalan ( 4 ) . They reduced
cinchonine t o dihydrocinchonine and
converted t h e product i n t o cinchlopoin
e t h y l e s t e r i n which C 3 and C4 r e t a i n
t h e o r i g i n a l c o n f i g u r a t i o n of cinchonine.
The l a t t e r w a s converted i n t o t h e dib-
romide which,by means of a s e r i e s of
r e a c t i o n s , a l l of which proceeded under
mild c o n d i t i o n s and d i d not involve t h e
c h i r a l c e n t e r s , w a s converted i n t o 1,2-
diethylcyclohexane [l]. This w a s shown
QUINIDINE SULFATE 487
[13
The c y c l i c e t h e r s t r u c t u r e i s only p o s s i b l e
i f t h e group a t t a c h e d t o C3 and C8 a r e i n t h e
endo-position [ 31. Thus i n cinchonine and
q u i n i d i n e , t h e hydrogen atoms a t C3 and C8
a r e c i s with r e s p e c t t o each o t h e r . Also
because c4 and c8 a r e c i s - o r i e n t e d , it
follows t h a t t h e hydrogen atoms a t C3, C4
and c8 a r e a l l c i s - o r i e n t e d i n cinchonine
and quinidine whereas i n cinchonidine and
quinine t h e hydrogens a t C3 and C 4 are c i s ,
but t h e hydrogen a t C3 and c8 a r e t r a n s .
For each c o n f i g u r a t i o n a t C8, two isomers
a r e p o s s i b l e which d i f f e r i n o r i e n t a t i o n a t
Cg. Since a l l a l k a l o i d s a r e i d e n t i c a l i n
c o n f i g u r a t i o n except at c8 and Cg, f o u r
isomeric substances are p o s s i b l e i n each
s e r i e s . For example, two of t h e s e substances
a r e presented by quinine and quinidine , t h e
o t h e r two members are epiquinine and e p i -
quinidine. The o t h e r ' members a r e
cinchonine, cinchonidine, epicinchonine and
epicinchonidine.
) quinine ( + ) quinidine
QUINIDINE SULFATE 489
782.95 (dihydrate)
746.92 ( anhydrous)
1.4. Elemental Composition
C , 61.36%; H, 6.95%; N , 7.16%,
0, 20.44%; S, 4.09% (dihydrate)
2. Physica1 Properties.
Sal. 164'
Dic. 147' (Both by hot bar method)
2.3. Solubility
2.6. Loss on d r y i n g
2.7. pH range
2.8.1 U l t r a v i o l e t . Spectrum
The W spectrum o f q u i n i d i n e s u l f a t e i n
e t h a n o l ( F i g . 1) w a s scanned from 200 t o
400 nm u s i n g DMS 90 Varian Spectrophotometer.
It e x h i b i t e d t h e f o l l o w i n g W d a t a (Table 1).
Table 1 UV c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s of q u i n i d i n e
sulfate
X max. a t nm -
E
205 5 -
231 -
273 31320
317.5 5089.5
331 5481
Other r e p o r t e d W s p e c t r a l d a t a for
q u i n i d i n e s u l f a t e i n methanol (1):-
Amax. a t 208 nm, 236 nm (34900), 280 nm
(3740) and 334 nm ( 5 8 7 0 ) .
QUINIDINE SULFATE 491
0.
492 MOHAMMED A. LOUTFY ETAL.
and f o r q u i n i d i n e i n e t h a n o l (11):-
Amax. a t 236 nm ( E 1%, 1 cm 1110), 278 nm
( E 1%, 1 cm 1 3 2 ) and 332 nm ( E l%, 1 cm 163).
2.8.2 I n f , r a r e d Spectrum
Table 2. I R c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s of q u i n i d i n e
sulfate
-1
Frequency ,cm As si gnment
3340 OH bonded
2300 NH+( q u i n u c l i d i n e )
2950 CH s t r e t c h
1620 CN
[ C=C ( a l k e n e )
1600,1510,1475 C=C (aromatic)
1245,1230,1100 ,1050 e t h e r linkage
860,835,800,720 T r i s u b s t i t u t e d benzene
The I R e x h i b i t e d t h e f o l l o w i n g o t h e r
c h a r a c t e r i s t i c bands:
1435, 1360, 1310, 1150, 940, 920, 765, 625
and 610 cm-l.
Other I R d a t a f o r q u i n i d i n e s u l f a t e (1)and
f o r q u i n i d i n e (11)have been a l s o r e p o r t e d .
2.8.3.1 Proton S p e c t r a
The PMR s p e c t r a of b o t h q u i n i d i n e
s u l f a t e i n DMSO D6 and q u i n i d i n e
i n C D C l 3 were r e c o r d e d on a Varian
QUINIDINE SULFATE 493
Table
Group
2H
3H
5H
7-H, 8-H
vinylic
0-CH3
quinuclidine
s = s i n g l e t , d=doublet q = q u a r t e t , m=
m u l t i p l e t bs=broad s i n g l e t , b d =broad doublet.
Other PMR d a t a of q u i n i d i n e have been r e p o r t e d (1).
I , , 1 1 1 , I . . I .... ... .
l " " I " " 1 '
500
I ' 1 1
400 *
I I
iw
. I
lk
'
iI
I
. -
I
*
.
1 . . . . 1 -
I
... 1 . - .. 1 I . 1
1 . . . . 1 . . . . 1 . . . . 1 . . . . l . * . . ~ ,
. I
2.8.3.2 13C-NMR
139.40(d) C 101.94(d )
‘18 5
‘8 130*99(d) 5 0
66.86( a )
QUINIDINE SULFATE 497
I
Figure 6. The 13C-NMR O f f Resonance Spectrum of
Quinidine Sulfate
498 MOHAMMED A. LOUTFY ETAL.
c20
48.34 ( 9 ) 23.19(t)
C 18.22(t)
15 47.56(t) '14
s = s i n g l e t , d=doublet , t e r i p l e t , q = q u a r t e t .
Other 13C-NMR d a t a f o r q u i n i d i n e ( 1 3 , 1 4 ) ,
q u i n i d i n e maleate ( 1 3 ) , e p i q u i n i d i n e (14 ) and
dihydroquinidine (14) have a l s o been r e p o r t e d .
H3CO
q u i n i d i n e m / e 324
QUINIDINE SULFATE 501
3. P r e p a r a t i o n of q u i n i d i n e s u l f a t e
3.1. I s o l a t i o n of q u i n i d i n e
4
e x t r a c t with d i l . H2S04
Alkaloids b i s u l f a t e
1 1
filtrate
Quinidine, Cinchonine, Cinchonidine sulfate
Add NaOH and e x t r a c t with e t h e r
.c I
4
+
Add b o i l i n g water+Na2C03
Q.uinine
aqueous ether
Cinchonine Quinidine, Cinchonidine
evaporate t o dryness e x t r a c t with d i l . H C 1
e x t r a c t with alcoholt
decolorise with charcoal
and leave t o c r y s t a l l i s e
I
neutralize acid solution,
Cinchonine add Na k tartarate
PA
I
4
filtrate
(Cinchonidine t a r t . ) (Quinidine t a r t . )
Add H C 1 Ada IU
Alkaloid H C 1
+ NH40H
1
ppt. (Quinidine H 1 )
1
Cinchonidine
Add + NHhOH
Quinidine
J
3.2. Quinidine s u l f a t e
Q u i n i d i n e s u l f a t e i s o b t a i n e d by n e u t r a l i z i n g t h e
a l k a l o i d q u i n i d i n e w i t h d i l u t e s u l f u r i c a c i d and
r e c r y s t a l l i s i n g from b o i l i n g water t o g i v e f i n e
n e e d l e l i k e c r y s t a l s of q u i n i d i n e s u l f a t e ( 2 0 ).
4. S y n t h e s i s of Q u i n i d i n e
4.1. P a r t i a l S y n t h e s i s
Rabe and Kindler i n 1918 ( 2 1 ) achieved t h e f i r s t
p a r t i a l s y n t h e s i s of q u i n i n e and q u i n i d i n e from
quinotoxine .
Quinotoxine w a s converted by t h e a c t i o n of sodium
hypobromite i n t o N-bromoquinotoxine which w a s
c y c l i z e d by a l k a l i w i t h t h e l o s s of hydrogen
bromide t o g i v e quininone. Reduction of t h e k e t o n e
w i t h aluminium powder and e t h a n o l i n t h e p r e s e n c e
o f e t h o x i d e gave a mixture of s t e r e o i s o m e r i c a l c o -
h o l s from which q u i n i n e and q u i n i d i n e were i s o l a t e d .
S e v e r a l methods f o r t h e t o t a l s y n t h e s i s o f
q u i n i d i n e have been r e p o r t e d @+-29,22).Two of
t h e s e methods are p r e s e n t e d i n scheme 1 and 2.
Other methods are i n c l u d e d i n q u i n i n e hydroch-
l o r i d e ( 30).
504 MOHAMMED A. LOUTFY ETAL.
N-benzoylhexahydroisoquinolone [ 11 is hydrogenated
with rhodium on alumina catalyst to give predomi-
nantly cis-isoquinolone [ 21 which is treated with
sodium azide in poly-phosphoric acid to give a
mixture of the seven-membered lactams which is
separated by fractional crystallisation to give [ 31.
Lactam [3] is treated with dinitrogen tetroxide to
give the N-nitrosolactam [4] which is rearranged
upon heating to the diazolactone [5] and fragmented
with extrusion of nitrogen to give a mixture of
racemic N-benzoylmeroquinene [ 61 and the seven
membered lactone [gal (in 50 and 30% yield, respec-
tively). The latter [?a] can be converted into [6]
which upon esterification gives N-benzoylmero-
quinene methyl ester [6al. This ester is treated
with 6-methoxylepidyllithium [ 71 in tetrahydrofuran
to give the racemic N-benzoylketone [ 8 ] . This is
treated with diisobutylaluminium hydride in toluene
at - 78' [route a] to remove the benzoyl group with
concomitant reduction of the ketone function to
give the aminoalcohol [9]. The aminoalcohol [ 91 is
first acetylated with acetic acid containing 10%
boron trifluoride etherate and treated with boiling
benzene - acetic acid - sodium acetate where cycliza-
tion proceeds to give a mixture of desoxyquinine
and desoxyquinidine [ 1 2 ] . This can also be achieved
without acetylation. The aminoalcohol [9] is reflu-
xed with benzene - acetic acid mixture ( 4 : 1 ) for
4-5 days when cyclization proceeds via dehydration
[ 113 to give both desoxyquinine and desoxyquinidine
[121.
Upon stirring a solution of [12] in dimethylsulfo-
xide-t-butylalcohol ( 4 : l ) containing potassium
t-butoxide in an atmosphere of oxygen affords a
mixture of quinine [13] and quinidine [ 1 4 ] . Separa-
tion can be effected by a combination of crystalliza-
tion and chromatography.
[a1 Acetylation
[91
MOHAMMED A . LOUTFY ETAL.
I
COOC2Hg COOC2H5
I
COOC2H5
C 00 C 2 H 5
& H
+
[31
c1
2 COCl
[41
0 c6H5
0
0 c6H5 C6H5
[6 1
510 MOHAMMED A. LOUTFY E T A .
QUINIDINE SULFATE 511
R R
I
I
C151
R=OCH3
512 MOHAMMED A. LOUTFY ETAL.
5. Biosynthesis of Quinidine
__T
corynantheal
I
H
I
H A
I
514 MOHAMMED A. LOUTFY ETAL.
Quininone
Quinidinone
H
Quinine
L.
I
H?CO
Quinidine
QUINIDINE SULFATE 515
6. Metabolism
The metabolism of quinidine has been extensively studied
in human and rat urines. The metabolic products of
quinidine found in man are:-
(3s)-3-hydroxyquinidine (13,16,38) $-quinidinone (13,16)
¶
( 3s )-3-hydroxyquinidine
516 MOHAMMED A. LOUTFY ETAL.
Ho\
H H
HO
2-quinidinone 0-Desmethylquinidine
7. Pharmacokinetics
When a d m i n i s t e r e d o r a l l y , q u i n i d i n e s u l f a t e i s absorbed
r a p i d l y and peak c o n c e n t r a t i o n s i n plasma are a t t a i n e d
i n 60 t o 90 minutes. The a b s o r p t i o n of q u i n i d i n e glu-
conate i s slower and maximal c o n c e n t r a t i o n s a r e not
observed u n t i l 3 t o 4 hours a f t e r an o r a l dose ( 4 5 ) .
Q u i n i d i n e accumulates r a p i d l y i n most t i s s u e s except
b r a i n , and t h e apparent volume of d i s t r i b u t i o n i s 2 t o
3 l i t e r s p e r kilogram ( 4 5 ) . Following o r a l a d m i n i s t r a t i o n ,
t h e a b s o l u t e b i o a v a i l a b i l i t y of q u i n i d i n e i s about 70%
o f t h e i n g e s t e d dose b u t may v a r y widely between p a t i e n t s
(46,47,48).
Plasma q u i n i d i n e c o n c e n t r a t i o n s are g e n e r a l l y h i g h e r and
appear e a r l i e r when t h e drug i s a d m i n i s t e r e d on an empty
stomach (49,50). About 70 t o 80% of q u i n i d i n e i n plasma
i s bound t o plasma albumin. The drug e n t e r s e r y t h r o c y t e s
and a p p a r e n t l y b i n d s t o hemoglobin; a t a s t e a d y s t a t e
c o n c e n t r a t i o n s of q u i n i d i n e i n plasma and e r y t h r o c y t e s
are approximately e q u a l s ( 5 1 ) .
Q u i n i d i n e i s metabolized by t h e l i v e r and e x c r e t e d i n
t h e u r i n e . The mean v a l u e f o r t h e e l i m i n a t i o n h a l f - l i f e
of q u i n i d i n e i s 6 t o 7 hours (45,52-54). Ochs e t a l .
( 5 4 ) have r e p o r t e d t h a t t h e e l i m i n a t i o n h a l f - l i f e of
q u i n i d i n e i s g r e a t e r i n t h e e l d e r l y persons ( o v e r 60 y e a r s )
when compared t o t h e younger p e r s o n s (less t h a n 35 y e a r s ) .
T o t a l body q u i n i d i n e c l e a r a n c e i s about 4.5 ml/min/Kg
w i t h wide p a t i e n t t o p a t i e n t v a r i a t i o n s (48, 53).
QUINIDINE SULFATE 517
9. Methods of Analysis
9.1 Identification
a. Thalleioquin t e s t : The a d d i t i o n of
2 drops of bromine s o l u t i o n t o 5 m l of
a s a t u r a t e d s o l u t i o n of quinidine or
quinine or a 1:lOOO s o l u t i o n of t h e i r
s a l t s , followed by 1 ml of ammonia solu-
t i o n produces an emerald-green c o l o r due
t o t h e formation of t h a l l e i o q u i n .
Quinidine and i t s diastereoisomer quinine
a r e d i f f e r e n t i a t e d by ( i )t h e i r o p t i c a l
r o t a t i o n s (quinidine i s dextrorotatory
while quinine i s l e v o r o t a t o r y ) , and by
( i i )t h e i r behavior toward a l k a l i t a r t a -
r a t e (18). I n n e u t r a l or s l i g h t l y a c i d
s o l u t i o n s quinine i s p r e c i p i t a t e d by
a l k a l i t a r t a r a t e , while quinidine i s not.
( i i i )On t h e o t h e r hand, quinidine i n
moderately d i l u t e s o l u t i o n i s p r e c i p i t a t e d
by soluble iodides but quinine i s not
a f f e c t e d (18).
b. To a 0.5% w/v s o l u t i o n add an equal
volume of M sulphuric a c i d ; an i n t e n s e
blue fluorescence i s produced ( 9 ) .
c. A 1% s o l u t i o n gives a yellow but not
a blue c o l o r with bromothymol blue ( 6 ) .
d. To 5 m l o f a 1% s o l u t i o n add 1 m l
of s i l v e r n i t r a t e s o l u t i o n and s t i r with
a g l a s s rnd; a f t e r a s h o r t i n t e r v a l a
white p r e c i p i t a t e , s o l u b l e i n n i t r i c a c i d ,
i s produced ( d i s t i n c t i o n from many o t h e r
alkaloids ) ( 6) .
e. Quinidine sulphate y i e l d s t h e reac-
t i o n s c h a r a c t e r i s t i c of sulphates.
A study of color changes of
quinidine and o t h e r a l k a l o i d s , i n r e l a t i o n
t o time has been described (57). The
c o l o r t e s t s with concentrated sulphuric
QUINIDINE SULFATE 519
Photomicrographs o f t h e c r y s t a l s formed
are i l l u s t r a t . e d i n Fig.9 (58).
The following m i c r o - c r y s t a l t e s t s are a l s o
useful i d e n t i f i c a t i o n tests:
i ) Potassium i o d i d e s o l u t i o n g i v e s
irregular crystals, often triangular
( s e n s i t i v i t y : 1 i n 3000) (11).
i i ) Sodium c a r b o n a t e s o l u t i o n produces
dense r o s e t t e s , forming o v e r n i g h t ( s e n s i -
t i v i t y : 1 i n 1000) (11).
iii) Dissolve t h e sample (1mg) i n water
( 2 ml), a c i d i f y w i t h d i l u t e s u l p h u r i c
a c i d (1 d r o p ) and add a few drops o f an
aqueous s o l u t i o n c o n t a i n i n g 5% o f cadmium
i o d i d e and 10% o f potassium i o d i d e .
Q u i n i n e g i v e s c o l o r l e s s c r y s t a l s and
t h e s o l u t i o n becomes t u r b i d ; q u i n i d i n e
g i v e s pale-yellow c r y s t a l s more s l o w l y ,
but t h e c o l o r change o f t h e s o l u t i o n i s
e a s i l y d e t e c t e d . This r e a c t i o n h a s been
u t i l i s e d f o r t h e d i s t i n c t i o n between
q u i n i n e and q u i n i d i n e ( 5 9 ) .
Vignoli e t a l . ( 6 0 ) have d e s c r i b e d d e t e r m i n a t i o n
o f a l k a l o i d c o n t e n t of cinchona powder by e x t r a c -
t i o n w i t h aqueous s o l u t i o n s of v a r y i n g pH. The
extract w a s evaporated t o a sludge on a steam
b a t h and t h e n oven-dried a t 95'. The d r y e x t r a c t
was weighed and t h e a l k a l o i d c o n t e n t determined.
9.3 T i t r i m e t r i c Methods
9.3.1 Aqueous
Schneider ( 6 1 ) h a s d e s c r i b e d t h e determina-
t i o n of some m i n e s a l t s , i n c l u d i n g quini-
d i n e s u l f a t e . The salt ( 0 . 1 g m ) i s d i s -
s o l v e d i n 90% e t h a n o l ( 1 0 m l ) , and t h e
520 MOHAMMED A. LOUTFY ETAL.
FIG, 9. l ? I C R O C H E M I C A L C R Y S T A L S OF O U l N l D l N E
SULFATE WITH KI.
QUINIDINE SULFATE 521
s o l u t i o n is p a s s e d , a t 2 t o 3 m l p e r
minute, through a n anion-exchange r e s i n .
The combined p e r c o l a t e s are d i l u t e d w i t h
d i s t i l l e d water and t h e l i b e r a t e d q u i n i -
d i n e i s t i t r a t e d w i t h 0 . 1 N HC1 u s i n g
T a s h i r o ' s i n d i c a t o r , u n t i l t h e green-blue
c o l o r changed t o v i o l e t ( 6 2 ) .
Thomis and K o t i o n i s ( 6 3 ) have p u b l i s h e d
t h e i n f l u e n c e of o r g a n i c b a s e s on t h e
p a r t i t i o n o f i n d i c a t o r a c i d s (and v i c e
v e r s a ) i n a water-chloroform system. T h i s
a f f o r d s a method f o r t i t r a t i n g q u i n i d i n e
and o t h e r b a s e s . A s o l u t i o n o f t h e sample
( 0 . 2 m l ) , mixed w i t h 2 ml of b u f f e r solu-
t i o n (pH 5.5) and 15 m l of chloroform,
i s t i t r a t e d w i t h 0.001 M bromothymol b l u e ,
vigorous shaking b e i n g a p p l i e d between
a d d i t i o n s . The end p o i n t i s marked by
a yellow c o l o r i n t h e aqueous l a y e r . This
t i t r a t i o n i s used as a n approximate d e t e r -
mination. An a c c u r a t e d e t e r m i n a t i o n i s
t h e n made by adding an excess of 0.0004M
bromothymol b l u e t o t h e s o l u t i o n o f t h e
b a s e , b u f f e r e d a t pH 7.5, e x t r a c t i n g w i t h
chloroform and determining t h e bromothymol
bl.ue i n t h e chloroform l a y e r by e x t r a c t i n g
it w i t h aqueous sodium hydroxide and com-
paring t h e color of t h e a l k a l i n e e x t r a c t
w i t h s t a n d a r d s . These p r i n c i p l e s are used
i n t h e determination of a l k a l o i d s , includ-
i n g q u i n i d i n e , and o t h e r b a s i c drugs i n
some pharmaceutical p r e p a r a t i o n s .
9.3 2 Non-Aqueous
Non-aqueous t i t r a t i o n s have been p u b l i s h e d
f o r t h e q u a n t i t a t i o n of q u i n i d i n e a l k a l o i d
and s a l t . The drug i s t i t r a t e d by per-
c h l o r i c a c i d i n a c e t i c a c i d and t h e end-
p o i n t i s determined p o t e n t i o m e t r i c a l l y .
The method w a s used f o r t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n
of q u i n i d i n e s u l f a t e , u s i n g b r i l l i a n t
green and F e t t b l a u B as i n d i c a t o r s ( 6 4 ) .
Non-aqueous t i t r a t i o n o f s m a l l amount of
a l k a l o i d i n t h e p r e s e n c e of a n a d s o r p t i o n
e l e c t r o d e h a s been r e p o r t e d ( 6 5 ) .
522 MOHAMMED A. LOUTFY ETAL.
Determination of q u i n i d i n e , and o t h e r
a l k a l o i d s , by means of t h e hydrochloric
a c i d complex of chloroaluminium isopro-
poxide i n non-aqueous media, has been rep-
o r t e d ( 6 6 ) . The d e v i a t i o n i s ? 1%in the
range 38 t o 245 mg of t h e a l k a l o i d .
9.3.3 Complexometric
9.3.5 Polarographic
9.4 Chromatography
9.4.1. Paper Chromatography
Clarke(l1) has described several solvent
systems for identification of quinidine,
as shown in Table 5.
524 MOHAMMED A . LOUTFY ETAL..
2. Acetate buffer
( pH=4.58 )
3. Phosfate buffer
(pH=7.4
h Rf
Solvent System (Rf x 100) Ref.
1. Quenching, 254 nm - -
2. Fluorescence, 366 nm (formic a c i d or Light b l u e 88
sulphuric a c i d s p r a y )
3. Dragendorf f ' s modification :
Munier - Macheboeuf Yellow Orange-red -
Munier Light yellow Orange-red -
Light yellow Brown 130
s Munier, sodium n i t r i t e
white
Vaguj f a l v i Light yellow Orange -
Bregoff-Delwiche Light yellow Orange 88
4. Iodine vapour Yellow white Brown 88
5. Iodine i n potassium i o d i d e White Brown -
6. Iodine i n methanol Light yellow Brown 146
7. Iodine vapour, p r r o l e vapour Yellow Brown 147
8. Iodine i n potassium i o d i d e and s i l v e r - - 135
acetate
9. F e r r i c c h l o r i d e , i o d i n e i n potassium i o d i d e Light green Brown 148
yellow
contd.. .
Reagent Background Color Ref.
Color
- ~~~ ~
q u i n i d i n e and q u i n i n e ) , and t h e i r c o r r e s -
ponding dihydro d e r i v a t i v e s d i h y d r o q u i n i d i n e
and dihydroquinine ( i n which t h e v i n y l group
a t C 3 i s r e p l a c e d by an e t h y l g r o u p ) .
TL chromatographic s e p a r a t i o n of cinchona
a l k a l o i d s has been reviewed by Verpoorte,
e t al. ( 8 8 ) , w i t h emphasis on t h e mobile
phases used, and t h e s e n s i t i v i t i e s of
v a r i o u s d e t e c t i o n methods. Some g e n e r a l
conclusions are drawn on t h e e s t a b l i s h m e n t
of optimum c o n d i t i o n s f o r s p e c i f i c separa-
t i o n s of cinchona a l k a l o i d s . TLC s e p a r a t i o n
(89-106) and TLC i d e n t i f i c a t i o n of cinch-
ona a l k a l o i d s i n food(107-108) and i n b i o l o -
g i c a l material (109-123) have been r e p o r t e d .
S e p a r a t i o n , i d e n t i f i c a t i o n , and q u a n t i t a t i v e
d e t e r m i n a t i o n of q u i n i d i n e , and o t h e r cin-
,
chona a l k a l o i d s o f a b u s e have been r e p o r t e d
(124-136) S e p a r a t i o n o f q u i n i d i n e and
q u i n i n e from d i h y d r o q u i n i d i n e and dihydro-
q u i n i n e has been d e s c r i b e d (88).
Table 6 l i s t s s o l v e n t s used f o r t h e separa-
t i o n o f q u i n i d i n e . The TLC d e t e c t i o n methods
are given i n Table 7.
D e t e c t i o n of dihydro-alkaloids i n commercial
q u i n i d i n e and q u i n i n e has been p u b l i s h e d
(137).
Hashmi e t al. (138)have r e p o r t e d semi-
q u a n t i t a t i v e d e t e r m i n a t i o n of cinchona
a l k a l o i d s by c i r c u l a r TLC.
Robles and Wient j e s ( 139 ) have s t u d i e d , by
TLC, t h e decomposition on s t e r i l i z a t i o n ,
of q u i n i d i n e hydrogen s u l f a t e .
9.4.3
- G
A g a s - l i q u i d chromatographic d e t e r m i n a t i o n
of q u i n i d i n e s u l f a t e has been adopted i n our
l a b o r a t o r y , u s i n g a Varion GC-3700 gas
chromatograph equipped w i t h a flame i o n i s a -
t i o n d e t e c t o r . The g l a s s column ( 2 m x 2 mm
w a s packed w i t h 3% OV-17 on 80-100 mesh
Chromosorb W HP. The c a r r i e r gas ( h e l i u m )
flow-rate w a s maintained a t 25 ml/minute.
Ethanol w a s used a s s o l v e n t and t h e c h a r t
speed w a s a d j u s t e d t o g i v e 1 cm/minute.
530 MOHAMMEDA. LOUTFY E T A .
0-Desmethylquini.dine
3-Hydroxy-quinidine
Quinidine
Quinidine-lO.11-
dihydrodiols
I &
~~
L , 1 1 I I
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 min
Fig. 11. HPLC Separation of Quinidine
Metabolites
QUINIDINE SULFATE 531
9.5 Spectrophotometry
9.5.1 Colorimetric
9.5.2 Ultraviqlet
9.5.3 Infrared
9.5.6 Spectrofluorimetric
10. References
43. B.B. Brodie, J.E. Baer and L.C. Craig, J. Biol. Chem.,
-
188, 567, (1951).
44. S.E. Barrow, A.A. Taylor, E.C. Horning and M.G. Horning,
J. Chromatog., 181,219 (1980).
45. J.T. Bigger Jr. and B.F. Hoffman in "Goodman and Gilman's
The Pharmacologica.1Basis of Therapeutics" Eds. A.
Goodman Gilman, L.S. Gocdman and A. Gilman, 6 t& ed.,
p. 7 7 0 , Macmillan Publishing Co. Ind., New York, (1980).
75. F.A. Leisey and J.F. Grutsch, Anal Chem. , 28, 1553 (1956).
76. R.L. Charles and A.M. Knevel, J. Pharm. S c i . , &,
1678 (1965).
77. L. Molnar and K. Molnarova, Chem. Z v e s t i , ll, 259 (1957).
78. L. Molnar, Acta Chim. Acad. Sci. Hung., 2, 273 (1956).
79. M. Souckova and J. Zyka, Ceckosl. Farm., L, 227 (1955).
80. R.N. Rama and N . J . Singh, C u r r . S c i . , bJ, 193 (1980).
81. L.A. D a l Cortivo, C.H. Willumsen, S.B. Weinberg, and
W. Matusiak, Anal. Chem, 33, 1218 (1961).
1. Description 548
1. I Nomenclature 548
1.2 Formulae 548
1.3 Molecular Weight 554
1.4 Elemental Composition 554
1.5 Appearance, Color, Odor, and Taste 554
2. Physical Properties 554
2.1 Melting Range 554
2.2 Eutectic Temperature 554
2.3 Solubility 554
2.4 Loss on Drying 554
2.5 pH Range 555
2.6 Optical Rotation 555
2.7 Spectral Properties 555
3. Preparation of Quinine Hydrochloride 567
3.1 Synthesis of Quinine 567
3.2 Quinine Hydrochloride 567
4. Synthesis of Quinine 569
4.1 Partial Synthesis 569
4.2 Total Synthesis 569
5. Biosynthesis of Quinine 583
6. Metabolism 586
7. Pharmacokinetics 587
8. Indications and Dosages 587
8.1 For The Treatment of Malaria 587
8.2 For The Relief of Nocturnal Leg Cramps 588
9. Toxicity 588
10. Methods of Analysis 589
10.1 Identification 589
10.2 Gravimetric Methods 59 1
10.3 Titrimetric Methods 591
10.4 Chromatographic Methods 595
10.5 Spectroscopic Methods 606
References 612
ANALYTlCAL PROFILES OF DRUG SUBSTANCES 547 Copyrighi by ihe American Pharmaceutical Assacration.
VOLUME 12 ISBN 0-12-260812-7
548 FARID J. MUHTADI ETAL.
1. Description
1.1. Nomenclature
c) a-(6-methoxy-4-quinolyl)-5-vinyl-2-
quinuclidinemethanol, hydrochloride
(1:l) salt, dihydrate.
d) -
6-methoxy- a ( 5-vinyl-2-quinuclidinyl)
-4-quinolinemethanol, hydrochloride
(1:l) salt, dihydrate.
e) ( a s ) - ~.-(6-methoxy-quinolin-h y1)- a
-[ (2R, 4S, 5R)-( 5-vinylquinuclidin-
2 yl)] methanol, hydrochloride (1:l)
salt, dihydrate.
Quinine hydrochloride j
Quinine chloride;
Quinine monohydrochloride;
Quinine muriate.
1.2. Formulae
1.2.1 Empirical
QUININE HYDROCHLORIDE 549
1.2.2 Structural
[ 130-89-2I
If Q represents t h e quinoline h a l f , t h e
s t r u c t u r e of q u i n i n e may be w r i t t e n as
f o l l o w s :-
The c y c l i c e t h e r s t r u c t u r e i s only p o s s i b l e if t h e
group a t t a c h e d t o C 3 and C 8 are i n t h e endo-
p o s i t i o n [ 81. Thus i n cinchonine and q u i n i d i n e ,
t h e hydrogen atoms a t C 3 and c8 a r e c i s with
r e s p e c t t o each o t h e r . Also,because C 4 and C 8
a r e c i s - o r i e n t e d , it follows t h a t t h e hydrogen
atoms a t C 3 , C 4 and C 8 a r e a l l c i s - o r i e n t e d i n
cinchonine and quinidine whereas i n cinchonidine
and quinine t h e hydrogens a t C 3 and C 4 are c i s ,
but t h e hydrogen a t C 3 and c8 are t r a n s .
For each c o n f i g u r a t i o n a t c8, two isomers a r e
p o s s i b l e which d i f f e r i n o r i e n t a t i o n a t Cg.
Since a l l a l k a l o i d s a r e i d e n t i c a l i n c o n f i g u r a t i o n
except a t c8 and Cg, four isomeric substances
a r e p o s s i b l e i n each s e r i e s . For example, two
of t h e s e substances are presented by quinine and
q u i n i d i n e , t h e o t h e r two members a r e epiquinine
and epiquinidine. The o t h e r two members a r e
cinchonine, cinchonidine, epicinchonine and
epicinchonidine.
I n most r e s p e c t quinine and quinidine p a r a l l e l
one another c l o s e l y i n t h e i r chemical behavior
and d i f f e r q u a l i t a t i v e l y from t h e isomeric p a i r ,
epiquinine and epiquinidine. Since quinine and
quinidine d i f f e r i n c o n f i g u r a t i o n a t c8, t h e s e
f a c t suggest t h a t t h e two a l k a l o i d s d i f f e r a l s o
i n configuration a t C
z. It i s p o s s i b l e t o deduce
t h e c o n f i g u r a t i o n a t 9 by comparing t h e b a s i c i -
t i e s of quinine and i t s Cg-epimer with t h e
b a s i c i t i e s of (-)-ephedrine and (+)-$-ephedrine.
I
HO --C
Q/H ' H
( - )quinine (+)quinidine
H--d ,OH
Q
'
epiquinine epiquinidine
554 FARID J. MUHTADI E T A .
396.88 ( d i h y d r a t e )
360.88 (anhydrous )
Fine c o l o r l e s s o r white s i l k y n e e d l e - l i k e
c r y s t a l s , o f t e n grouped i n c l u s t e r s , o d o r l e s s ,
and has a v e r y b i t t e r t a s t e .
2. Physical Properties
Quinine hydrochloride m e l t s a t : -
145 - 153' ( 1 2 ) by hot s t a g e method
162O ( 1 2 ) by h o t b a r method
158 - 160° (13)
156 - woo (8)
2.2. Eut ec t i c Tempera t u r e
Phenacetin 100'
Benzanilide 114' ( 1 2 ) by h o t s t a g e method
Phenacetin 106"
Benzanilide 118' ( 1 2 ) by hot b a r method
2.3. Solubility
2.5. pH Range
[ a ,I Solvent Ref.
X h x . at -
E
205
232 -
277 2381
321 2858
332 3334
Figure 1. The W Spectrum of Quinine Hydrochloride i n Ethanol
QUININE HYDROCHLORIDE 557
Other r e p o r t e d U.V. s p e c t r a l d a t a f o r
quinine hydrochloride i n a l c o h o l ( 8 ) :-
Xmax. a t 278 nm (2512) and 331 nm (3236)
and for quinine i n ethanol ( 1 6 ) :-
Xmax. a t 236 nm ( E 1%, 1 cm 1110), 278 nm
( E 1%, 1 cm 133) and 332 ( E 1%, 1 cm 1 6 3 ) .
The UV absorption s p e c t r a of quinine and i t s
hydrochloride s a l t i n o t h e r s o l v e n t s were
also reported (16-18).
2.7.2 I n f r a r e d Spectrum
-1
Frequency cm Assignment
3300 OH bonded
+
NH ( q u i n u c l i d i n e )
2580
2960 CH s t r e t c h
1615 CN
[ C=C ( a l k e n e )
1600,1512,1480 C=C (aromatic )
1248,1230,1100,1030 e t h e r linkage
860,838,808,725 T r i subst it u t ed
benzene
Other c h a r a c t e r i s t i c absorption bands a r e :
1438,1365,1345,1320,1140,1130,1010,990 ,
935, cm-1.
Other I R d a t a f o r quinine hydrochloride ( 8 )
and f o r quinine (16) have been a l s o reported.
Hayden and Sammul (19) described t h e I R
s p e c t r a of dimorphous and amorphous forms of
quinine.
FIG. 2 THE IR SPECTRUM OF Q U I N I K E HYDROCHLORIDE A S KBR DISC.
QUININE HYDROCHLORIDE 559
2.7.3.1 Proton S p e c t r a
The f o l l o w i n g s t r u c t u r e assignments
have been made (Table 3).
Table 3 PMR c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s of
quinine hydrochloride
s = s i n g l e t , d = doublet, q = quartet
m = m u l t i p l e t b s = broad s i n g l e t
bd = broad d o u b l e t , 2d = doublet of d o u b l e t s ,
b t = broad t r i p l e t .
13
2.7.3.2 C-NMR
13
C-NMR n o i s e decoupled and o f f
resonance s p e c t r a are p r e s e n t e d i n
F i g . 5 and Fig. 6 r e s p e c t i v e l y .
Both were recorded over 5000 Hz
width i n C D C l 3 ( c o n c e n t r a t i o n
52.9 mg/l ml) on J e o l FX-100 NMR
Spectrometer, u s i n g a 1 0 mm sample
t u b e and TMS as a r e f e r e n c e s t a n -
dard a t 20'.
The carbon chemical s h i f t s are
a s s i g n e d on t h e b a s i s of t h e
a d d i t i v i t y p r i n c i p a l s and t h e o f f
resonance s p l i t t i n g p a t t e r n
(Table 4 ) .
s = s i n g l e t , d = doublet, t = t r i p l e t , q = q u a r t e t .
3. P r e p a r a t i o n of Quinine h y d r o c h l o r i d e
3.1. I s o l a t i o n of Q u i n i n e
Quinine i s t h e p r i n c i p a l a l k a l o i d o f cinchona
b a r k of which s e v e r a l s p e c i e s are known. Cinchona
o f f i c i n a l i s L. ( C . l e d g e r i a n a Moens) , Family
Rubiaceae i s t h e most important. It c o n t a i n s about
8% q u i n i n e ( 2 4 ) . Q u i n i n e w a s i s o l a t e d from cinchona
b a r k by P e l l e t i e r and Caventou i n 1820 ( 2 5 ) .
Q u i n i n e h y d r o c h l o r i d e i s o b t a i n e d by n e u t r a l i z -
i n g t h e a l k a l o i d quinine with d i l u t e hydrochloric
a c i d and r e c r y s t a l l i s i n g from b o i l i n g w a t e r t o g i v e
f i n e c o l o r l e s s c r y s t a l s of q u i n i n e h y d r o c h l o r i d e .
568 FARID J. MUHTADl ETAL.
1 filter
I
f
Alkaloids b i s u l f a t e s
Heating a + Na2C03
90 O (PH 6 . 5 )
Alkaloids s u l f a t e s
Purify + charcoal b o i l
and f i l t e r
Cool f i l t e r a t e
+
F i l t e r a t e of
*
P r e c i p i t a t e of
quinine s u l f a t e
Quinidine cinchonine
sulfates etc.
Na2S03
1
Quinine
solution
4. Synthesis of Quinine
4.1. Partial Synthesis
into ~-hydroxy-8-methylisoquinoline[ 5 1.
Compound [ 51 on catalytic reduction, followed by
acetylation gives N-acetyl-7-hydroxy-8-methyl-
1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline [6], which on
further catalytic reduction by heating with a
Raney nickel catalyst under pressure and then
followed by oxidation with C r O 3 is converted into
N-acetyl-~-keto-8-methyldecahydroisoquinoline[ T I .
This compound is a mixture of cis-and trans-iso-
mers, these are separated and the cis-isomer is
treated with ethylnitrite in the presence of
sodium ethoxide to give the homomeroquinene
derivative [8]. This on reduction gives the
corresponding aminocompound [g], which may now be
written more conveniently as shown. Exhaustive
methylation of [ 91 followed by hydrolysis gives
t cis homomeroquinene [lo] which after esterifica-
tion and benzoylation gives N-benzoylhomomero-
quinene ethylester [ll].
On condensation of [ 111 with excess ethylquininate
[lg] using sodium ethoxide produces the inter-
mediate B-ketoester [20]. This on heating with
hydrochloric acid is hydrolysed and decarboxylated
to (+)-quinotoxine [21]. This is resolved via its
dibenzoyltartrate. (+)-quinotoxine [ 221 which is
converted into quininone [23] upon N-bromination
and cyclization. Reduction of [23] with aluminium
powder and ethanol gives a mixture of stereoiso-
meric quinine and quinidine [24]which are separated.
Quinic acid required for the synthesis of
quinine was prepared by Rabe et al. ( 27). p-
anisidine [121 is condensed with acetoacetic
ester [ 1 3 ] to give the condensate [14]. This is
treated with sulfuric acid where ring closure
occurs to give 2-hydroxy-4-methyl-6-methoxy-
quinoline [15]. The phenolic hydroxyl group of [15]
is eliminated upon treatment with a mixture of
phosphorous pentachloride and phosphorous oxy-
chloride to give 2-chloro-4-methyl-6-methoxyquinol-
ine [16] which upon hydrogenation gives 4-methyl-
6- methoxyquinoline [ 171. Knoevenagel condensation
of the latter followed by oxidation gives quinic
[l81 which upon esterification gives ethylquininate
[191
Scheme 11: Total synthesis of quinine and
quinidine according to Uskokovic et al. (4).
QUININE HYDROCHLORIDE 571
i) H p R a n e y N i
i i ) ~r03
-G
0
- IJCOCH3
CH3
[71 Ii ) C H ON0
2 5
i i ) C H ONa
2 5
Q c g L T
H5c$2c H2N-CH ‘ QN=C C O C H 3
11 [81
CH3 [91 HO C H 3
QUININE HYDROCHLORIDE 573
1241 [241
( f ) Quinidine (+)Quinidine
574 FARID J . MUHTADI ETAL.
H F O COOC2H5
d ' 3 " " 3 P'ii)KMnOq
C6H5CH0
ester.
L
[191 [181
QUININE HYDROCHLORIDE 575
N-benzoylhexahydroisoquinolone [ 11 is hydrogen-
ated with rhodium on alumina catalyst to give
predominantly cis-isoquinolone [2] which is
treated with sodium azide in poly-phosphoric acid
to give a mixture of the seven-membered lactams
which is separated by fractional crystallisation
to give [ 31. Lactam [3] is treated with dinit-
rogen tetroxide to give the N-nitrosolactam [4]
which is rearranged upon heating to the diazo-
lactone [5] and fragmented with extrusion of
nitrogen to give a mixture of racemic N-benzoyl-
meroquinene [6] and the seven membered lactone [?a]
(in 50 and 30% yield, respectively). The latter
[5a] can be converted into [6] which upon esterifi-
cation gives N-benzoylmeroquinene methyl ester
[6a]. This ester is treated with 6-methoxyle-
pidyllithium [7] in tetrahydrofuran to give the
racemic N-benzoylketone [8]. This is treated with
diisobutylaluminium hydride in toluene at - 78O
[route a] to remove the benzoyl group with con-
commitant reduction of the ketone function to give
the aminoalcohol [g] . The aminoalcohol [9] is
first acetylated with acetic acid containing 10%
boron trifluoride etherate and treated with boiling
benzene - acetic acid - sodium acetate where
cyclization proceeds to give a mixture of desoxy-
quinine and desoxyquinidine [12]. This can also
be achieved without acetylation. The aminoalcohol
[9] is refluxed with benzene - acetic acid mixture
(4:l) for 4-5 days when cyclization proceeds via
dehydration [ 111 to give both desoxyquinine and
desoxyquinidine [12].
Upon stirring a solution of [12] in dimethyl-
s u l f o x i d e - t - b u t y l a l c o h o l ( 4 :1) containing potas-
sium t-butoxide in an atmosphere of oxygen affords
a mixture of quinine [13] and quinidine [14].
Separation can be effected by a combination of
crystallization and chromatography.
An alternative synthetic route [b] via the amino
epoxide [lo] is as follows:-
N-benzoylketone [8] is converted into a mixture
of diastereomeric N-benzoyl epoxides [lo a] by
bromination followed by sodium borohydride reduc-
tion. Reductive debenzoylation of [lo a] with
diisobutylaluminium hydride in toluene at - 78'
furnished a mixture of diastereomeric amino-
576 FARID J. MUHTADI ETAL
EtOH HC1
[21
N-0
[3
i;' H
' c
0
c6H5
L41
I)-
I
R=H [61 Ac6H5
R=CH3 [ 6a 1
QUININE HYDROCHLORIDE 577
CHeLi
r
[6al + conden. .
4
"71
0
A c6H5
H3C0
[81
H CO
3
191
578 FARID I. MUHTADI ETAL.
H 3 c 0+ y 3
CHO
CH=PPh3
I
H3c000 [31 H
..
+ COCH3
[41
conden.
-
\
H3C0
QUININE HYDROCHLORIDE 583
5. Biosynthesis of Quinine
Postulation of the biosynthetic pathway of cinchona
alkaloids started in 1950 with the suggestion of Goutarel
et al. ( 2 8 ) that quinine and other cinchona alkaloids
are derived from indolic precursors, since cinchonamine
(indole alkaloid) occurs as a minor alkaloid in cinchona.
This was proved when Kowanko and Leete ( 2 9 ) have isolated
labelled quinine upon feeding trypt0phan-2-~~C into
cinchona plants. They have shown that the quinoline
ring and Cg unit of quinine originated from tryptophan.
Further studies have proved that quinine is biosynthesi-
zed by a combination of indolic and monoterpenoid units
which leads to the corynanthe type indole alkaloids.
Thus tryptophan ( 2 9 ) , geraniol (30-32) and loganin ( 3 3 )
were incorporated into quinine. Tracer experiments on
Cinchona ledgeriana carried out by Battersby and Parry
( 3 4 ) have established the biosynthetic pathway of
quinine as presented in scheme V.
Scheme V: Biosynthesis of Quinine
Loganin Secologanin
p)-JyOH
\ H
Tryptophan
Vincoside -
584 FARID J. MUHTADI ETAI;.
Corynantheal
LHO
Cine honaminal
I
-
H
H k
QUININE HYDROCHLORIDE 585
Quinidine
586 FARID J . MUHTADI ETAL.
6. Metabolism
The cinchona alkaloids are extensively metabolized in
the body, especially in the liver, so that less than 5%
of an administered dose is excreted unaltered in the
urine (35-37).
The metabolism of quinine has been studied both in
human and rat urines. The major urinary metabolites in
man are hydroxyderivatives of quinine (37). The route
of quinine metabolism in man proposed by Brodie et al.
(37)involves two parallel pathways as presented in the
f o l l o w i n g scheme.
Scheme VI: Metabolism of quininein Man
H3CO
7. Pharmacokinetics
9. Toxicity
10.1. Identification
a. Dissolve 1 0 mg i n s u f f i c i e n t water t o
produce 10 ml and t o 5 m l of t h e s o l u t i o n
add 0.2 m l of bromine water and t h e n 1 m l
of 2 M ammonia, an emeraldgreen c o l o r i s
produced.
c . Quinine a l k a l o i d can be i d e n t i f i e d w i t h
ammonium t e t r a k i s ( t h i o c y a n a t o ) z i n c a t e ( 4 2 ) .
d. I n t o x i c o l o g i c a l work, it i s o f t e n d e s i -
r e d t o d e t e c t very s m a l l q u a n t i t y of quinine.
A very s e n s i t i v e t e s t has been r e p o r t e d (45).
10.1.2 Micro-Crystal T e s t s
v) I d e n t i f i c a t i o n of q u i n i n e i n human u r i n e
h a s been d e s c r i b e d (48) by t h e f o l l o w i n g
method :
A f t e r a c i d h y d r o l y s i s t o f r e e t h e b a s e from
i t s g l u c u r o n i d e , q u i n i n e i s e x t r a c t e d from
a l k a l i n e s o l u t i o n by chloroform. The s o l v e n t
i s evaporated and t h e r e s i d u e , d i s s o l v e d i n
methanol, i s s u b j e c t e d t o TLC. The p l a t e
i s sprayed w i t h i o d o p l a t i n a t e , and t h e
methanolic e x t r a c t o f t h e s p o t i s t h e n
subjected t o s p e c i f i e d microscopical tests.
The product i s i d e n t i f i e d by t h e c r y s t a l
formed.
lo.3. T i t r i m e t r i c Methods
10.3.1 Aqueous
Schneider ( 5 1 ) has p u b l i s h e d t h e a p p l i c a -
b i l i t y o f t h e s t r o n g l y b a s i c anion-exchangers
t o t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n of q u i n i n e , H C 1 and
592 FARID J. MUHTADI ETAL.
10.3.3 Complexometric
drug i s p r e c i p i t a t e d a t pH 1 . 2 t o 1.5
w i t h bismuth potassium i o d i d e , and t h e
excess of t h e reagent i s determined as b i s -
muth complexometrically.
10.3.4 Conductimetric
High-frequency t i t r a t i o n of q u i n i n e , HC1,qui-
nine,H2S04, a n d o t h e r s a l t s of organic
compounds , has been r e p o r t e d (68). Graphs
i l l u s t r a t i n g t h e high-frequency conducti-
metric t i t r a t i o n of t h e s e s a l t s have been
described. For quinine, H C 1 , t h e t i t r a n t
i s 0.01 N s i l v e r n i t r a t e ; for quinine,H$O4,
t h e t i t r a n t i s 0 . 0 1 M barium c h l o r i d e , 0.01 M
barium a c e t a t e , or 0.008 N potassium hydroxide.
I n t h e t i t r a t i o n of q u i n i n e , H2S@4with potas-
sium hydroxide, e x t r a p o l a t i o n i s necessary
t o determine t h e p o i n t of i n f l e c t i o n of t h e
graph.
10.3.5 Amperometric
Lemahieu e t a l . ( 6 9 ) have r e p o r t e d an
aniperometric determination of q u i n i n e , H C 1
i n dimethyl sulphoxide. The method i s based
on t i t r a t i o n w i t h s i l v e r n i t r a t e i n dimethyl
sulphoxide t o give an end-point corresponding
t o t h e formation of AgC1; and a less sharp
end-point f o r t h e p r e c i p i t a t i o n of s i l v e r
c h l o r i d e . U s e of t h e f i r s t end-point and
two platinum i n d i c a t o r e l e c t r o d e s with a
p o t e n t i a l d i f f e r e n c e of 100 mV allows
t i t r a t i o n down t o a 0.2 m M c o n c e n t r a t i o n of
q u i n i n e , HCI.. Use of one i n d i c a t o r e l e c t r o d e
and a s i l v e r - Ag+ r e f e r e n c e e l e c t r o d e
prodcces a l e s s sharp end-poir,t, not obtain-
a b l e below a m M concentration.
i s based on t h e a d d i t i o n o f I C 1 t o t h e
v i n y l group of q u i n i n e . The r e a c t i o n i s
complete i n 20-25 minutes.
10.3.6 Polarographic
Souckova and Zyka(72,73) have r e p o r t e d a
polarographic d e t e r m i n a t i o n of q u i n i n e , H C l
by t i t r a t i o n with t u n g s t o s i l i c i c a c i d ,
tungstophosphoric, and molybdophosphoric
acids (73). The a p p a r a t u s h a s a dropping -
mercury cathode and S.C.E. anode, t h e v o l t a g e
b e i n g 0.65V. The pH o f t h e s o l u t i o n i s
a d j u s t e d w i t h HC1. The m a x i m u m e r r o r i s f
1% w i t h t u n g s t o s i l i c i c a c i d and 22% w i t h t h e
two o t h e r a c i d s .
Q u a n t i t a t i v e o s c i l l o g r a p h i c polarography of
c e r t a i n a l k a l o i d s , including quinine alka-
l o i d , have been a l s o r e p o r t e d
Cinchona a l k a l o i d s g i v e c h a r a c t e r i s t i c
o s c i l l o g r a m s which can b e used f o r t h e i r
d e t e r m i n a t i o n with an accuracy of f 4%.
1 0 . 4 . Chromatographic Methods
A l w a s e t a l . (88) have r e p o r t e d t h e
s e p a r a t i o n and q u a n t i t a t i v e a n a l y s i s of
quinine, and o t h e r a l k a l o i d s , by a p p l i c a t i o n
of paper ionophoresis. Jakube e t a l .
have described t h e use of paper chromatogra-
phy i n t h e assay o f m i x t u r e s of pharmaceuticals,
including quinine s a l t s . I n t h i s method,
mixtures of water, low-boiling a l c o h o l
(methanol, ethanol , o r isopropanol) , and
ammonia have been found t o be t h e b e s t
s o l v e n t s , and a mixture of FeC13 w i t h
K 3 Fe (CN)6, t h e b e s t d e t e c t i n g agent.
1. Chloroform-diethylamine ( 9 :1) 17 59
2. Chloroform-methanol - 25% ammonia (85 :14:1) 44 60
3. Chloroform-acetone-diethylamine (5:4:1) 17 61
4. Chloroform-acetone - ( 3 m l 25% ammonia + 17 m l absolute 21 39
ethanol) (5:4:1)
5. Chloroform-acetone-methanol -25% ammonia (60 :20 :20 :1) 37 61
-
fn
00
6.
7.
8.
Chloroform-ethylacetate-isopropanol-diethylamine ( 2 0 :70:4 :6 )
Chloroform-dichloromethane-diethylamine (20:15:5)
Dichloromethaqe-diethyl ether -diethylamine (20:15:5)
11
22
23
39
39
39
9. Kerosene-acetone-diethylamine (23:9 :9) 32 62
10. Acetone - 25% ammonia (58:2) 32 39
11. Ethyl acetate-isopropanol -
25% ammonia (45:35:5) 49 39
12. Toluene-ethyl acetate - diethylamine (7:2:1) 12 63
13. Toluene-ethyl acetate-diethylamine (10:10:3) 18 39
1 4 . Toluene-diethyl ether-diethylamine (20:12:5) 18 64
15. Toluene-diethyl ether-dichloromethane-diethylam-ine 20 65
(20 :20 :20 :8)
16. Carbon tetrachloride-n-butanol-methanol-10% ammonia (12 :9:9:1) - 39
Solvent System
Conditions :
Silica gel plates Si 60 F 254 pre-coated aluminum sheets,
20x20 cm (Merck);
temperature, 2422';
relative humidity, 2525%;
normal chromatography chamber, saturated for 30 minutes before use
Table 6 TLC Detection of Quinine
1. Quenching, 254 nm 39
2. Fluorescence 360 nm (formic a c i d o r s u l p h u r i c
a c i d spray) Light b l u e 39
3. Dragendorff's modification:
Munier - Macheboeuf Yellow Orange-red 39
Munier Light-yellow Orange-red 67
Munier-sodium n i t r i t e Light -yellow- Brown 67
white
Vaguj f a l v i Light -yellow Orange 39
Bregoff-Delwiche Light -yellow Orange 39
4. Iodine vapour Yellow-white Brown 39
5. Iodine i n K I White Brown 68,69
6. Iodine i n methanol Light -yellow Brown 60
7. Iodine i n K I and s i l v e r a c e t a t e - - 70
8. F e r r i c c h l o r i d e , iodine i n K I Light green- Brown 71
yellow
9. Iodoplat i n a t e Dark v i o l e t Violet 39
10. Iodoplatinate, a c i d i f i e d Dark v i o l e t Violet 72
11. F e r r i c hexacyanoferrate Light green- Dark green 45
blue blue
Background
Reagent Color Color Ref.
~ ~~~
HYDROXYQUININE+
0-DESMETHYL-
I QUININE-10,ll-
DIHYDRODIOLS
J
QUININE
lPiNINE
-CARBOSTYRIL
I
1 I , 1
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 min.
Fig. 12 HPLC Separation of Quinine Metabolites
Table 7. HPLC Systems of quinine
A study of t h e r e t e n t i o n behavior of
quinine, and some o t h e r b a s i c drug sub-
stances, by ion-pair HPLC has been described
(127). By appropriate adjustment of expe-
rimental parameters, complex separations
can be achieved.
Jeuring e t a l . (126) have reported a r a p i d
determination of quinine and i t s hydro-
chloride i n s o f t drinks and t o n i c water by
reversed-phase ion-pair chromatography. I n
t h i s assay method, quinine i s determined i n
t h e concentration range of 20-100 mg and
recoveries ranged from 97 t o 103%.
10.5. Spectroscopic Methods
10.5.1 Colorimetric
10.5.2 Ultraviolet
10.5.4 Spectrofluorimetric
Ragazzi and Veronese (141) have published
a fluorimetric determination of quinine and
some other alkaloids, after separation by
TLC on magnesium oxide. Quinine is separa-
ted from natural materials or from mixed
pharmaceutical preparations on a layer
prepared from a suspension of hydrated
magnesium oxide in 2.5% aqueous CaC12, using
ethyl acetate - acetone (4:l) as the develop-
ing solvent. After locating the spots of
quinine under W light, they are removed
from the plate and dissolved in acid and the
solution is used for the fluorimetric
determination. Quinine emits fluorescence
at 450 nm when excited at 350 nm.
Brzezinska and Dzeidzianowicz (142) have
reported a fluorimetric assay of quinine
in the presence of aspirin and phenacetin.
Quinine is extracted from the mixture by a
known volume of 0.1 N H2SO4 and the intensity
of fluorescence of quinine sulphate extract
is then measured and referred to a calibra-
tion graph. Beer's law is obeyed for 1 to
50 p.p.m. of quinine in the extract.
Schmollack and Wenzel (143) have described
a fluorimetric determination of quinine in
the nanogram range with use of a chamber
paper-analysis (KAPA) apparatus. Fluori-
metric measurements of quinine sulphate
solution is carried out at 366 nm, showing
a rectilinear calibration between 5 and 50
pg/ml. For 48 measurements at 30 l.lg/ml, the
coefficient of variation is 7.69%.
Other fluorescence analysis of quinine
as well as various natural and synthetic
drugs has been reported (144).
Fluorescence spectra have been determined
in ethanol, concentrated HC1, 10% NaOH, and
QUININE HYDROCHLORIDE 611
10.5.5 Phosphorimetric
11.References
a,860,
2. R.B. Woodward and W.E. Doering, J . h e r . Chem. SOC.,
(1945); m i d , 66, 849, (1944).
67 C.V. Yeh and F.H. Tsang, Yao Hsueh Pao, l0, 1 0 (1963);
Chem. Abstr. , 2, 13768 (1963).
83. R.N.V. Rama and N.J. Singh, Curr. Sci., 49,193 (1980).
84. U.R. Cieri, J. Pharm. Sci. , 58, 1532 (1969).
95. H.V. Street and S.K. Niyogi, Nature, 190, 1199 (1961).
96. H. Steger and A. Storz, Pharmazie,,6.l 126 (1961).
97. I. Jakube', V. Laskova, and E. Slamova, Farmacia,
-
25, 137 (1956); Anal. Abstr., 5, 225 (1958).
98. J. Kolankiewicz and M. Nikonorow, Acta Polon. Pharm.,
-
16, 115 (19591.-
99. J. Stork, J.P. Papin, and D. Plas Ann. F'harm. Fr.,
-
17, 1 0 1 (1971).
100. R.A. Egli, Z. Anal. Chem. , 259, 277 (1972).
139. V.K. Vera and B. Zora, Acta Pharm. Jugosl., Id, 111
(1968); Anal. Abstr. , 2,4337 (1970).
146. J.M. Meola and M. Vanko, Clin. Chem., 20, 184 (1974).
QUININE HYDROCHLORIDE 621
1. Description 624
1.1 Nomenclature 624
1.2 Formulae 625
1.3 Molecular Weight 626
1.4 Elemental Composition 626
1.5 Appearance, Color, Taste, and Odour 626
2. Physical Properties 626
2.1 Crystal Properties 626
2.2 Melting Point 626
2.3 Solubility 626
2.4 Optical Rotation 621
2.5 Spectral Properties 627
3. Stability and Incompatibility 639
4. Isolation 639
4.1 Industrialition 639
5. Synthesisof Rutin 642
6. Biosynthesis of Rutin 65 1
7. Biological Properties 65 1
7.1 Phannacological Activity 65 1
7.2 MicrobiologicalActivity 654
7.3 Therapeutic Uses 656
7.4 Metabolism of Rutin 656
8. Methods of Analysis 658
8.1 IdentificationTests 658
8.2 Quantitative Determination 660
8.3 UV Spectrophotometry 664
8.4 PMR Spectrometry 664
8.5 Fluorimetry 666
8.6 Polarography 666
8.7 Densitometry 667
8.8 Gravimetry 668
8.9 Other Analytical Uses 668
8.10 Chromatography 668
References 675
ANALYTlCAL PROFILES OF DRUG SUBSTANCES 623 Copyright by the American Pharmaceutical Associalion.
ISBN 0-12-260812-7
VOLUME I2
624 TAHA I. KHALIFA ETAL.
1. Description
1.1. Nomenclature
3-[[6-0-(6-Deoxy- -L.mannopyranosyl)
-~-D-glucopyranosyl]oxy]-2-(3,4-di-
hydroxyphenyl)-5,7-dihydroxy-4H-I-
benz op yran-4 -one.
/
Flavone, 3, 5
, 4 , 5-7-pentahydroxy,
3(6(0(6-deoxy- -L-mannopyranosyl))
$-D-glucopyranoside.
Quercet in-3-rut i n o s i d e .
1.1.3. Pharmacopoeias
Rutin i s o f f i c i a l i n t h e f o l l o w i n g phar-
macopoeias (8) :
1.1.4. Pharmacopoeia1 P r e p a r a t i o n s
Th& f o l l o w i n g p r e p a r a t i o n s are o f f i c i a l
i n t h e r e s p e c t i v e pharmacopoeias ( 9 ) :
(b) T a b u l e t t a e R u t i n i ( R u s s i a n and
German pharmacopoeias), Each t a b l e t
c o n t a i n s 20 mg (Russian) o r 50 mg
(German) of r u t i n .
1.2.1. Empirical
R u t i n o s e is: 6-0-(6-Deoxy-'DC-L-mannopyra-
nosy1)-D-glucose w i t h e m p i r i -
c a l f o r m u l a C12H22010 mol.
wt.326.30 and s t r u c t u r a l
f o r m u l a as f o l l o w s :
H
H OH
626 TAHA I. KHALIFA ETAL.
T h i s s t r u c t u r e w a s proposed by Zemplen
and Gerecs (11) and confirmed by t h e
t o t a l s y n t h e s i s of r u t i n achieved by
Shakhova e t a 1 ( 1 2 ) .
610.51
2. Physical Properties
2.1.1. Water of C r y s t a l i z a t i o n
2.3. Solubility
2.5.1. U l t r a v i o l e t Spectrum
The UV spectrum of a u t h e n t i c r u t i n i n
95% methanol was scanned u s i n g Pye Unicam
SP 800; from 200-500 nm. 2-4 d r o p s of
2 M NaOH s o l u t i o n were added t o t h e c e l l
s o l u t i o n and t h e spectrum w a s measured i n
presence of a l k a l i . Other s p e c t r a l
s h i f t s were recorded by scanning
d i f f e r e n t 95% e t h a n o l s o l u t i o n s of r u t i n
t o which w a s added s u c c e s s i v e l y powdered
sodium a c e t a t e and b o r i c a c i d and by
adding two d r o p s 5% a l c o h o l i c aluminium
c h l o r i d e s o l u t i o n and t h e n dil.HCl(13-13.
The W and V i s i b l e S p e c t r a l maxima and
s h i f t s f o r r u t i n are shown i n Table I and
F i g . 1.
bH 0
628
Ethanol S o l u t i o n S p e c t r a l Maxima (nm) Spectral effect Structural diagnosis
S = Shouder
2.5.2. I n t r a r e d Spectrum
3330 OH (bonded)
2920 CH s t r e t c h
1660 c=o
1620 c=c
1600 Aromatic s t r u c t u r e
1510 C = C aromatic
1460
1360 c - 0 - c
1295 c-0-c
1200 c-0-c
1060 c-0-c
8 10 S u b s t i t u t e d aromatics
These f i n d i n g s are i n agreement w i t h r e p o r t e d d a t a
(16). Other f i n g e r p r i n t bands c h a r a c t e r i s t i c t o r u t i n
are: 970, 880, 730 and 700.
The p r o t o n NMR S p e c t r a of f l a -
von i d s have been e x t e n s i v e1y
s t u d i e d (13). A t y p i c a l PMR
s p e c t r a of r u t i n are shown i n
Fig. 3 & 4. The sample w a s
d i s s o l v e d i n DMSO-D6 and TFA
r e s p e c t i v e l y , and run on a
Varian T 60A, 60-MHz NMR Spect-
rometer. All chemical s h i f t s
632 TAHA I. KHALIFA ETAL.
I I I I I I I 1 I +
I 1 - I
500 400 300 200 100
I . 1 I . I
I I I I I I I I 1
reported a r e i n reference t o
t e t r a m e t h y l s i l a n e (TMS) a t 0
ppm. The PMR s p e c t r a l a s s i g n -
ments of r u t i n are given i n
T a b l e 3.
DMSO-D5 -
TFA
Proton-noise and o f f - r e s o n a n c e
decoupled 13C-NMR s p e c t r a were
measured on a V a r i a n FT-80 A-
80 MHz F o u r i e r t r a n s f o r m NMR
Spectrometer o p e r a t i n g a t 23.5
m z . Samples were p r e p a r e d i n
1 0 mm 0.d. t u b e s i n approxtmate-
ly 10% s o l u t i o n i n D?'fSO-D6 w i t h
tetramethylsilane a s i n t e r n a l
r e f e r e n c e . S p e c t r a were r e c o r -
ded w i t h 8 K d a t a p o i n t s a t a
probe t e m p e r a t u r e of 23OC. For
an average s p e c t r a l width of
634 TAHA I. KHALIFA ETAL.
5000 Hz., a 1 0 ps p u l s e w i d t h
corresponding t o a t i l t angle
of 30° w a s employed w i t h 2 s
i n t e r v a l between p u l s e s . 13C-
NMR c o m p l e t e l y decoupled and
o f f - r e s o n a n c e of r u t i n a r e p r e -
s e n t e d i n F i g s . 5 and 6 and t h e
carbon chemical s h i f t s a s s i g n e d
on t h e b a s i s of t h e a d d i t i v e l y
p r i n c i p a l s and t h e o f f r e s o -
nance s p l i t t i n g p a t t e r n are
shown i n T a b l e 4 .
R e c e n t l y 1 3 C NMR d a t a of f l a v o -
n o i d s w e r e r e p o r t e d ( 17-24) .
Chang ( 2 5 ) determined 1% NMR
of t h e aglycone of r u t i n amongst
o t h e r f a l v o n o i d s by t h e g a t e d
decoupling t e c h n i q u e . The
s p e c t r a l i n t e r p r e t a t ion s we re
based on t h e i n f o r m a t i o n from
13C-lH c o u p l i n g p a t t e r n s .
OH
Rutinose
635
4600 H z
2doo
13
Fig. 5 C NM R OP Rutin, Noise Decoupled S p c t f U m .
4
1
i
I 3h
N
fig.6 C NMR OF Rutin, off Resonance Spectrum.
n n n n n n n
z z z w- z z z
m r l m o N r l e e
. . . . . . .
m b m * m o b
m r l r l U ) m e o
m
rl
m N N r ( r ( O 0 b
r l r l r l r l r l r l r l
n
a,
v)
0
U
1
cd rl
W\U)\d\N\Ul e U) M
W
U)
I
u
3 N O 3 A 1 3 V 8 V 3ns
a
*d
cd
U
I-r
aJ
U
G
0
n n n n
m m c n m m
w w v w .d
m h
. . . . .
r l U ) U l m *
e
rl
U
.d
a,
U ) m U ) e e 0 0
r l r l r l r l r l rl a
Ll
(d
M
:
cd w
Ul 03 N \* \m 0
G
0
P
Ll
cd
3 N 0 3 1 1 3 V 8 V 3 f l S U
.K
RUTIN 637
A B C
- -
,430 ,4[0
449
,
463472482
290
I . -
;I0
1 . 1
530 550 570 590
611 628
3. S t a b i l i t y and I n c o m p a t i b i l i t y
4. Isolation
4.1. Industrialization
Due t o t h e h i g h p e r c e n t a g e s of r u t i n c o n t a i n e d i n
t h e f a m i l y of Eucalyptus known as Myrtaceal [4-
?4% ( 2 7 ) ] ; thesc. s p e c i e s a r e processed now i n
A u s t r a l i a f o r t h e commercial p r o d u c t i o n of r u t i n
(27 6 31). Although many s o l v e n t s f o r t h e e x t r a c -
t i o n s t a g e have been i n v e s t i g a t e d i n c l u d i n g 95%
e t h a n o l , and hot d i l u t e i s o p r o p y l a l c o h o l ( 3 2 ) , a
s i n g l e - s t a g e b a t c h e x t r a c t i o n w i t h b o i l i n g water
is recommended. (Fig. 9) r e p r e s e n t s a flowsheet
diagram f o r t h e production of 50.000 l b l r u t i n p.a
from Eucalyptus l e a v e s a c c o r d i n g t o Humphrey's
method (31).
TAHA I. KHALIFA ETAL..
Ground p l a n t
mate f i a l
I Alcoholic
Extract I
S o l i d mate-
r,+
I 1
G ,
Cry st a l l i n e
Solid
Wash w i t h
water,followed iscard
by e t h e r
Crude
Rut i n
P u r i f i c a t i o n on Magnesium
s i l i c a t e column
Pure
Rut i n
. 8.
F i g~. Procedure O u t l i n e f o r I s o l a t i o n of Rutin.
RUTIN 641
I ,
H a r v e s t e d Leaves
of E u c a l y p t u s
1 Moi;;ye.
Comminution
U s i n g hammer
aS3<44 mesh
Ffill
I
Extract ion
Retention t i m e
usinE b o i l i n g
1 hour
water
I
Filtration
>0.7.5% R u t i n -
C o n s t r u c t i o n Material
(wood o r ceramic)
Crystalization
4 hours I
temp. 4n0c
R u t i n r e c o v e r y 95-97%
F i l t e r cake
n r v i n p:
Crush i n g Rutin p u r i t y
I Packing
P r o t e c t from l i g h t ,
F i g . 9: Flow s h e e t f o r t h e commercial p r o d u c t i o n of R u t i n .
642 TAHA I. KHALIFA ETAL..
5. Synthesis of Rutin
H3C0
OCH3 0
HO
I HI
Querc etin
RUTIN 645
COCH20CH3
OH
+
[11
ArCOO
0ch3
ArCOO 0
[31
KOH
EtOH
646 TAHAI. KHALIFA ETAL..
HO
OH 0
[41
HO
OH
OH 0
[51
RUTIN 647
O t OH O O H
COCH20CH3
HO FOCH2
OCH3
I
OH 0
[31
HO
648 TAHA I. KHALIFA ETAL.
OH
[51
RUTIN 649
CH2 -0
H OH
[71
-4 Tic14
CH20H
0 0
-
0
+ TiBr4
650 TAHA I. KHALIFA ETAL.
Ho(o$l
OH OH
AgOAc
Ace0 I OH
[i21
0cch3
II
0
HO
0
RUTIN 651
6. B i o s y n t h e s i s of R u t i n
P o s t u l a t i o n of t h e b i o s y n t h e t i c pathway of f l a v o n o i d s
s t a r t e d i n 1936 w i t h t h e s u g g e s t i o n o f Rohinson ( 3 6 )
t h a t t h e C15 s k e l e t o n of f l a v o n o i d s t o b e composed of
two p a r t s c 6 and Cg as f o l l o w s :
7. Biological Properties
7.1. Pharmacological A c t i v i t y
R u t i n a s w e l l as i t s aglycone, q u e r c e t i n , have
a d i r e c t c o n s t r u c t o r a c t i o n on t h e c a p i l l a r y bed
and d e c r e a s e t h e p e r m e a b i l i t y and f r a g i l i t y of
t h e v e s s e l s (40). It h a s been s u g g e s t e d t h a t
t h e s e s u b s t a n c e s could b e c l a s s e d a s v i t a m i n s ,
p a r t i c u l a r l y of t h e "Vitamin P" t y p e . R u t i n h a s
been found t o relax t h e i s o l a t e d i n t e s t i n e (41).
Administered i n t r a v e n o u s l y t o t h e dog and r a b b i t ,
i n d o s e s of 5, 20 and 100 mg/kg r e s p e c t i v e l y ,
r u t i n i n v a r i a b l y produces a lowering of t h e blood
pressure (42). Experimentally r u t i n p r o t e c t s
a g a i n s t c a p i l l a r y i n j u r y (43-44) and d e c r e a s e s
t h e erythematous r e s p o n s e t o l o c a l chloroform
i r r i t a t i o n (43 & 4 4 ) . T h i s action may be
due t o t h e a n t i a c i d a n t a c t i o n of r u t i n on adrena-
l i n e , thus r e s u l t i n g i n a s l i g h t increase i n its
l e v e l and so i n c r e a s i n g t h e t o x i c i t y o f t h e p r e -
c a p i l l a r y s p h i n c t e r s and d e c r e a s i n g t h e t o t a l
number of t r u e c a p i l l a r i e s f i t t e d w i t h f l o w i n g
blood (43 & 4 4 ) . An i n t e r e s t i n g e x t e n s i o n
652 TAHA I. KHALIFA ETAL.
Shikimic a c i d k
- Prephenic a c b-.
id
RUTIN 653
OH
HO
OH
OH 0
Quercetin
UDP-D-glucose
OH
Quercetin 3-glucoside
UDP-L-rhamnose
HO
Rutin OH OH OH
654 TAHAI.KHALIFA ETAL.
of t h i s h a s been t h e r e s u l t s o b t a i n e d from t h e
a d m i n i s t r a t i o n of r u t i n t o r a b b i t s s u f f e r i n g from
s t a n d a r d i z e d experimental p r o s t h i h e . A dose of
50 t o 100 mp;/kg p e r day by stomach t u b e produces
a marked acminution i n t h e loss of t i s s u e ganga-
r e n e following p r o s t b i t e of r a b b i t f e e t , b u t is
i n e f f e c t i v e i n p r e v e n t i n g loss of t i s s u e f o l l o -
wing p r o s t b i t e of r a b b i t ears (45) Quercetin
is less e f f e c t i v e i n t h i s regard t h a n r u t i n ( 4 6 )
Rutin p r o t e c t s a g a i n s t h i s t a m i n e shock i n an in-
d i r e c t way h u t i s n o t a t r u e a n t i h i s t a m i n i c (47).
7.1.1. LD 0
-5
LD50 determined i n mice by i n t r a v e n o u s
a d m i n i s t r a t i o n of propylene g l y c o l s o l u -
t i o n is 950 mg/kp hody weight (48).
tively.
-
0 0
QI hl
d
0
0
l-i
0 c
Kl
0 cr)
r-l
c
*rl
u
PI
U
&
PI
7
0
656 TAHA I. KHALIFA ETAL..
7.3. T h e r a p e u t i c Uses
C o n s i d e r a b l e i n t e r e s t h a s been evinced i n t h e
p o s s i b l e c l i n i c a l a p p l i c a t i o n of r u t i n t o t h e
medical t r e a t m e n t of t h e s i c k (53 - 5 7 ) .
R u t i n w a s f o r m e r l y used i n t r e a t m e n t of d i s e a s e
s t a t e s c h a r a c t e r i s e d by c a p i l l a r y f r a g i l i t y , b u t
evidence of i t s v a l u e i s i n c o n c l u s i v e . It h a s
been claimed t o b e e s p e c i a l l y of v a l u e i n t r e a t -
ment of r e t i n a l haemorrhage. Though t h e r e i s no
evidence t h a t c a p i l l a r y s t r e n g t h i s s p e c i f i c a l l y
a s s o c i a t e d w i t h v i t a m i n C , some workers have
claimed b e t t e r r e s u l t s from t h e u s e of r u t i n and
a s c o r b i c a c i d s t h a n from r u t i n a l o n e ( 8 ) .
R u t i n from tobacco l e a v e s w a s found e f f e c t i v e i n
t r e a t i n g p a t i e n t s w i t h h y p e r t e n s i o n complicated
by i n c r e a s e d c a p i l l a r y f r a g i l i t y ( 2 7 T 5 8 ) .
R u t i n can i n h i b i t t h e a c t i o n of h y a l u r o n i d a s e ,
p a r t i c u l a r l y when combined w i t h a s c o r b i c a c i d .
T h i s l e d t o t h e t e s t i n g of r u t i n w i t h a s c o r b i c
a c i d as an o r a l c o n t r a c e p t i v e b u t i t s e f f i c a c y i n
t h i s r e s p e c t h a s n o t y e t been confirmed. R u t i n
h a s been used w i t h s u c c e s s i n t r e a t i n g some t y p e s
of h e r e d i t a r y haemorrhagic d i s o r d e r s , s u c h as
haemophilia, and a l s o b l e e d i n g gums, m i g r a i n e
headaches, toxaemia i n pregnancy, e t c . ( 27 >.
I n t h e US, r u t i n i s o f t e n i n c o r p o r a t e d i n v i t a m i n
p r e p a r a t i o n s because of i t s e f f e c t i v e "vitamin P"
f u n c t i o n ( 27 ) .
Reports t h a t r u t i n a s w e l l as o t h e r "vitamin P"
l i k e flavonoids decreased m o r t a l i t y o r hastened
t h e r e c o v e r y of Roentgen-ray i r r i d i a t e d a n i m a l s
were c i t e d (59,60).
R u t i n and g e n e r a l l y b i f l a v o n o i d s s t i m u l a t e t h e
p r o d u c t i o n of blood p l a t e l e t s , which a r e impor-
t a n t i n c o a g u l a t i o n , and a r e recommended i n
t r e a t m e n t of thrombopenia ( 61 >.
7.3.1. T h e r a p e u t i c Dose (8)
50 - 300 mg d a i l y .
7. 4 . Metabolism of R u t i n
8. Methods of A n a l y s i s
8.1. I d e n t i f i c a t i o n Tests
a. D i l u t e s o l u t i o n of r u t i n g i v e s g r e e n
c o l o u r w i t h f e r r i c c h l o r i d e T.S. ( 1 ) .
b. R u t i n i s coloured brown by t o b a c c o en-
zyme under e x p e r i m e n t a l c o n d i t i o n s ( 2 ) .
c. On a p p l i c a t i o n of t h e modified indophe-
n o 1 method f o r t h e d e t e c t i o n of phenols
( 68 ) , r u t i n (> 10 pg) changes f i r s t
t o b l u e then t o green. The c o l o u r
f a d e s on t h e a d d i t i o n of 2 d r o p s 0.02%
aqueous s o l u t i o n of N a C l O ( 6 9 ) .
Among r e l a t e d compounds, h e s p e r i d i n
( > l o p g ) , h e s p e r t i n ( > 2 u g ) , and
a c a c e t i n (> 5 pg) g i v e a similar
c o l o r a t i o n which becomes more i n t e n s e
on a d d i t i o n of NaOCI.
8.1.3. M i c r o c r y s t a l Tests
R u t i n as w e l l a s i t s a g l y c o n e s q u e r c e t i n
(0.2% m e t h a n o l i c s o l u t i o n ) gave c h a r a c t e -
r i s t i c golden c r y s t a l s ( F i g . l o ) , w i t h 2 ,
4-dinitrophenylhydrazine H C 1 r e a g e n t ( l g
i n 30 m l methanol + 2 m l H2S04) ( 7 0 ) .
T h i s t e s t could b e u t i l i z e d f o r t h e r a p i d
d i f f e r e n t i a t i o n of r u t i n and q u e r c e t i n .
Fly, 10 Micfocf’sfals of Rutin A 1 and Quercetin ( 0 ) with 2,4 Dinitrophenylhydraline
TAHA I. KHALIFA E T A .
8.2. Q u a n t i t a t i v e Determination
8.2.1. Colorimetry
Use i s made of t h e c o l o u r e d d e r i v a t i v e s
having h i g h molar a b s o r p t i v i t y i n UV and
v i s i b l e r e g i o n , formed e i t h e r by c h e l a t i o n
w i t h metals o r by r e a c t i o n w i t h s u b s t i t u -
t i o n reagents.
8.2.1.1. Che l a t ion
i. With ALC13
A c c u r a t e l y weighed 5 g p l a n t
sample& of t h e material were
transferred into extraction
t h i m b l e s and e x t r a c t e d w i t h ab-
s o l u t e alcohol f o r 8 hours i n a
Soxhlet a p p a r a t u s . The a l c o h o l
e x t r a c t i o n w a s allowed t o c o o l to
room t e m p e r a t u r e and made up t o
250 m l volume u s i n g a b s o l u t e a l -
cohol. A 25 m l p o r t i o n of t h i s
s o l u t i o n w a s made up t o 100 m l
volume w i t h isoamyl a l c o h o l and
thoroughly mixed; a 20 m l a l i -
quot w a s t h e n t r a n s f e r r e d t o a
s e p a r a t i n g f u n n e l and shaken
w i t h f i v e s u c c e s s i v e p o r t i o n s of
25 m l of 0 . 1 M AlCl3 s o l u t i o n ,
a f t e r each s h a k i n g t h e s e t t l e d
aqueous l a y e r b e i n g r u n o f f i n t o
1000 m l v o l u m e t r i c f l a s k and
mixed t h o r o u g h l y , p l a c e d i n 1 cm
c e l l and t h e a b s o r p t i o n a t 416nm
n o t e d . The p e r c e n t a g e r u t i n w a s
t h e n c a l c u l a t e d from a s t a n d a r d
curve p r e p a r e d w i t h p u r e r u t i n
(71).
A s t h i s method does n o t
measure t h e rutin-AlC13 complex
alone but everything i n the
s o l u t i o n d e r i v e d i n t h i s way
which a b s o r b s a t 416nm, t h e p r e -
sence of o t h e r s u b s t a n c e s must
be checked by chromatography and
an examination of t h e a b s o r p t i o n
curve i n t h e r a n g e 35Onm-5OOnm.
Other flavonoid-AlC13 complexes
u s u a l l y have a b s o r p t i o n m a x i m a
RUTIN 661
which d i f f e r from t h e r u t i n -
A l C 1 3 complex.
An a l t e r n a t i v e p r o c e d u r e
( 72 ) f o r t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n
of r u t i n overcoming t h e f o r e -
mentioned d i s a d v a n t a g e s i s t o pa-
p e r chromatograph t h e m e t h a n o l i c
e x t r a c t of t h e p l a n t m a t e r i a l
w i t h e t h y l acetate-anhydrous
a c e t i c acid-water (50 :15 :18) a s
developer. After drying t h e
r u t i n s p o t was c u t o u t and ex-
t r a c t e d w i t h nleefianol (2 m l ) ,
t h e n w i t h anhydrous a c e t i c a c i d
(0.6 ml) and 20% aqueous p y r i -
d i n e (10 ml) and 12% m e t h a n o l i c
A1C13 r e a g e n t (2.5 m l ) were
added. The r e s u l t i n g s o l u t i o n
was d i l u t e d t o 25 m l and t h e ab-
s o r p t i o n was measured a t 42Onm
(5-cm c e l l s ) a g a i n s t water.
Beer's l a w was obeyed w i t h up t o
250 pg of r u t i n .
ii. With Beryllium N i t r a t e
To a sample c o n t a i n i n g 0.1 +
1 . 2 u moles of r u t i n ( o r i t s ag-
lycone q u e r c e t i n ) , an e q u a l
amount of B e (NO3)2 d i s s o l v e d i n
methanol was added, t h e n 2 N Na
a c e t a t e s o l u t i o n (1.5 ml) w a s
added, and t h e m i x t u r e was d i l u -
t e d t o 25 m l w i t h methanol.
A f t e r 10 minutes t h e absorbance
a t 465 nm was measured and t h e
r e s u l t s were r e f e r r e d t o a s t a n -
d a r d curve ( 7 3 ) .
R u t i n a s w e l l as i t s aglycone
q u e r c e t i n , r e a c t w i t h Be2+
g i v i n g r e s p e c t i v e l y , yellow and
orange I:1 complexes ( 7 3 ) .
i i i . W i t h Quadrivalent Titanium
Salts
The c o n c e n t r a t i o n s of r u t i n
an a l c o h o l i c e x t r a c t could be
measured by t h e i n t e n s i t y of
c o l o r of an orange yellow complex
662 TAHAI.KHALIFA ETAL.
The c o n c e n t r a t i o n of r u t i n
i n a l c o h o l i c e x t r a c t s was d e t e r -
mined a b s o r p t i o m e t r i c a l l y by
measuring t h e i n t e n s i t y of t h e
colour of an orange complex
formed by r u t i n and Uranyl ace-
t a t e . The maximum a b s o r p t i o n
was o b t a i n e d w i t h equimolar s o l u -
t i o n s i n a 1:l r a t i o (75 ) . Con-
c e n t r a t i o n s i n ppm range can be
determined by t h i s method ( 75 ) .
v. With Cupric S a l t s
i. With p-aminobenzoic a c i d
A methanolic s o l u t i o n of
r u t i n ( 4 ug) w a s a p p l i e d t o a
Whatman No. 1 paper, and deve-
loped f o r 10 hours by t h e
RUTIN 663
a s c e n d i n g t e c h n i q u e w i t h n-buta-
n o l - a c e t i c acid-water (20:5:11).
The r u t i n zone w a s l o c a t e d on
d r y chromatogram under UV o r by
t r e a t m e n t w i t h ammonia fumes.
The chromatogram w a s s e c t i o n e d
and e l u t e d i n a t e s t t u b e by
shaking w i t h 5 m l of acid-metha-
no1 ( 1 : l ) . For t h e c o l o r i m e t r i c
d e t e r m i n a t i o n 0.5% p-aminoben-
z o i c a c i d (0.4 m l ) , 10% H 2 S O 4
( 0 . 4 m l ) , 0.2% NaN02 s o l u t i o n
( 2 ml) and 10% NaOH s o l u t i o n
(5 ml) were added and t h e m i x t u r e
w a s shaken. The a b s o r p t i o n a t
420 nm, was measured immediately
( 79 ) . T h i s method c o u l d be
a p p l i e d t o o t h e r f l a v o n o i d com-
pounds 6 i s claimed c o n v e n i e n t f o r
samples w i t h a low r u t i n c o n t e n t
( 79 >.
ii. With E-aminocaproic a c i d
p h e n o l i c compounds makes i t a l -
most i m p o s s i b l e t o u s e such
methods f o r t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n of
t h e f l a v o n o i d components i n crude
plant extracts.
8.3. W Spectrophotometry
8.5. Fluorimetry
A method based on measuring t h e i n t e n s i t y of r u t i n
aglycone, q u e r c e t i n , as w e l l as o t h e r f l a v o n o i d s
complexes w i t h A 1 d i r e c t l y on p a p e r chromatograms
w a s d e s c r i b e d by Tyukavkina e t a 1 ( 87 ) . R u t i n
and o t h e r f l a v o n o i d s were s e p a r a t e d by a s c e n d i n g
chromatography on slow paper w i t h CHCl3-acetic
a c i d (1:2) a s a s o l v e n t . The chromatogram w a s
t r e a t e d w i t h 0.02 M A1C13 - 0 . 1 M Na acetate i n
50% e t h a n o l . Pieces of t h e chromatogram (3x4 cm)
were a t t a c h e d t o t h e w a l l of a c e l l i n a f l u o r i -
meter, and t h e f l u o r e s c e n c e of t h e complexes were
e x c i t e d w i t h a mercury lamp through a USF-3 f i l t e r
a t an a n g l e of 45O ( 8 7 ) . The r e c t i l i n e a r p a r t o f
t h e c a l i b r a t i o n graph l i e s i n t h e range of 1 . 6 -
3 iJg f o r q u e r c e t i n . The method w a s proved f o r
various flavonoids i n prepared mixture with a
d e t e c t i o n l i m i t of 0.05 I.rg and 0.8 I.rg f o r querce-
t i n and d i h y d r o q u e r c e t i n r e s p e c t i v e l y .
Another f l u o r i m e t r i c - p l a n i m e t r i c method f o r t h e
e s t i m a t i o n of r u t i n and f l a v o n o i d compounds w a s
d e s c r i b e d by J e r z y e t a 1 ( 88 ) . The f l a v o n o i d
compounds were s e p a r a t e d by two-dimensional p a p e r
chromatography a s d e s c r i b e d by Glotzbach and
Rimpler ( 89 ) and t h e n t h e c o n t e n t s of conpo-
n e n t f l a v o n o i d s were determined by p l a n i m e t r y
a f t e r d i r e c t measurement of t h e f l u o r e s c e n c e a t
365 nm ( 89 ) .
8.6. Polarography
A method based on t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n of n i t r o d e r i -
v a t i v e s of r u t i n (and q u e r c e t i n ) i n p h a r m a c e u t i c a l
p r e p a r a t i o n s w a s d e s c r i b e d by Davidek and Manousek
( go .) The drug ( 0 . 1 g) w a s d i s s o l v e d i n me-
t h a n o l (25 m l ) , and an a l i q u o t of t h i s s o l u t i o n
(0.5 ml) w a s mixed w i t h methanol (0.5 m l ) , 0.2 N
H2SO4 (5 ml) and 3 M KN02 (2 ml) i n a p o l a r o g r a -
p h i c v e s s e l . A f t e r bubbling t h e mixed s o l u t i o n
w i t h n i t r o g e n f o r 2 . 5 minutes, 2.5 M N a a c e t a t e
(2 ml) was added and t h e b u b b l i n g w a s c o n t i n u e d
f o r a f u r t h e r 4 minutes. The p o l a r o g r a p h i c c u r v e
w a s recorded and t h e f i r s t s t e p measured. The
h e i g h t of t h e s t e p w a s e v a l u a t e d by means of a
c a l i b r a t i o n curve o r by s t a n d a r d a d d i t i o n . It i s
r e p o r t e d t h a t even 10-6M s o l u t i o n of r u t i n may b e
analyzed; t h e h e i g h t of t h e waves are independent
of t i m e and t h e e r r o r is f 4% ( g o ) . A s c o r b i c
a c i d and o t h e r compounds l i k e l y t o be p r e s e n t i n
p h a r m a c e u t i c a l s are s a i d t o have no i n t e r f e r e n c e
( 90 1.
RUTIN 667
Another p o l a r o g r a p h i c d e t e r m i n a t i o n of r u t i n and
q u e r c e t i n i n c o n c e n t r a t i o n of Ca 1 0 - 6 ~a f t e r n i t r o -
s a t i o n by means of t h e f o u r - e l e c t r o n wave produced
by t h e r e d u c t i o n of t h e n i t r o s o group w a s a l s o
mentioned by t h e same a u t h o r s ( 91 ).
8.7. Densitometry
Cine e t a 1 ( 92 ) d e s c r i b e d a d e n s i t o m e t r i c method
€ o r t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n of r u t i n and q u e r c e t i n i n
m i x t u r e s . S e p a r a t i o n of r u t i n from q u e r c e t i n w a s
done on s i l i c a g e l G p l a t e s u s i n g a 72:18:10
benzene-pyridine a c e t i c a c i d system. The two
compounds were determined a t 370 nm and 400 nm
respectively. The d e t e r m i n a t i o n e r r o r was 5%.
8.8. Gravimetry
8.9.2. A s A n A n a l y t i c a l Reagent
8.10. Chromatography
The chromatographic d a t a of r u t i n
u s i n g one-dimensional descending
PC under d i f f e r e n t c o n d i t i o n s i s
g i v e n i n Table 7 .
8.18.1.2. Two-Dimensional Descending PC
R u t i n i s r o u t i n e l y used as a
s t a n d a r d marker i n s c r e e n i n g a l -
coholic plant e x t r a c t s f o r t h e i r
flavonoid p a t t e r n s using t h e
s o l v e n t s n-butanol-acetic acid-
water (4: 1:5; t o p l a y e r ) BAW,
and 5% a c e t i c a c i d ( 1 4 ) .
R u t i n i s u s e f u l s i n c e i t occu-
p i e s a p o s i t i o n approximately i n
t h e middle of t h e chromatogram
and a l s o i s , i t s e l f , v e r y
common i n p l a n t s and t h u s one of
t h e most l i k e l y compounds t o be
found d u r i n g s u r v e y work.
Table 7. Paper Chromatography of Rutin
Solvent
sl s2 s3 s4 s5 ‘6 s7
Detection W; Brownish Yellow Fluorescent s?ot
I
hRf 45 46 15 a3 45 51 23
8.10.1.3. P r e p a r a t i v e PC
P r e p a r a t i v e PC i s such a w e l l
known t e h c n i q u e and i t s u s e i n
t h e f l a v o n o i d f i e l d h a s been s o
well-reviewed r e c e n t l y (13, 1 4 ,
& 104 ) t h a t a b a r e o u t l i n e of
recommended t e c h n i q u e s should b e
sufficient .
The u s u a l p a p e r used f o r l a r g e
s c a l e s e p a r a t i o n (1-100 mg) i s
Whatman No. 3 o r i t s e q u i v a l e n t .
The s o l u t i o n t o b e s e p a r a t e d
(Ca. 1 0 ml) i s a p p l i e d as a con-
t i n u o u s even narrow s t r e a k o r
band a l o n g t h e s t a r t l i n e by suc-
c e s s i v e a p p l i c a t i o n s . For r u t i n
and t h e m a j o r i t y of f l a v o n o i d s
s e p a r a t i o n i s f i r s t e f f e c t e d by
t h e use of BAW m i x t u r e s ( e . g .
6:1:2). It i s convenient t o
l o c a t e t h e s p o r t s by t h e i r f l u o -
r e s c e n c e i n W. A f t e r l o c a t i o n ,
t h e bands are c u t o u t , t h e com-
pounds e l u t e d s e p a r a t e l y , u s u a l l y
w i t h 70% aqueous methanol, and
he s o l u t i o n s c o n c e n t r a t e d f o r
r e p u r i f i c a t i o n i n a second s o l -
vent.
Tomas e t a1 ( 1 0 5 ) s e p a r a t e d r u t i n , quer-
c e t i n and o t h e r f l a v o n o i d s on sephadex G-
25. Glyzosides were r e a d i l y e l u t e d w i t h
water, w i t h good s e p a r a t i o n of r u t i n and
q u e r c e t r i n : t h e accompanying aglycones
w e r e r e t a i n e d a t t h e t o p of t h e column and
could b e s u b s e q u e n t l y e l u t e d w i t h 0.1%
aqueous ammonia s o l u t i o n .
A 16~0.9cm column of Amberlite XAD-2
(200-400 mesh) maitltained a t 95OC w a s used
f o r t h e s e p a r a t i o n of many f l a v o n o i d s
( 1 0 6 ) . The column w a s f i r s t e q u i l i b r a -
t e d w i t h 20% e t h a n o l a t a f l o w r a t e of
60 ml/hour and a s o l u t i o n o r s u s p e n s i o n of
f l a v o n o i d s i n 20% e t h a n o l (each c o n t a i n i n g
l e s s t h a n 500 pg/ml) w a s placed on t h e t o p
of t h e column. A 100 m l volume of 20%
e t h a n o l i s run f i r s t , followed by l i n e a r
g r a d i e n t e l u t i o n w i t h a t o t a l volume of
RUTIN 671
1000 m l , t h e e t h a n o l c o n c e n t r a t i o n i n c r e a -
si-ng from 20 t o 9Oc. The r u t i n group
f l a v o n o i d s w e r e e l u t e d from t h e column i n
t h e o r d e r r u t i n , q u e r c i t r i n , and t h e n quer-
c e t i n (106 ) . T h i s p r o c e d u r e w a s a l s o
a p p l i e d t o t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n of f l a v o n o i d s
i n c r u d e m e t h a n o l i c e x t r a c t s from p l a n t s
( 106 ) .
The chromatographic behaviour of r u t i n
u s i n g LC under d i f f e r e n t p a r a m e t e r s i s
summarized i n T a b l e 8.
Kd = Dsstribution coefficient
* Under these conditions Ve/Vo = 2.2 Kd + 1; Ve = elution volume, Vo = intersitial volume.
u
0
$4 a
a, LA
P
i
cu
a
a
u
(d u
$4 c
1 a
u c)
m (I)
v) a
N
..L 0
t
(d
1
rl
F
a
c
.d
3
M 0
c
.r(
rl
rl
a
!i *a
u rl
v) a,
(d M
3 (d
0
.d %
0
-2
rl
rl d
v) 0
I
a $4
3 a
a
(d n
h rl rl
rl 4
0 rl
PI W
a,
CJ
!ll
N
al
w
d
673
674 TAHA I. KHALIFA ETAL.
The a g l y c o n e s of r u t i n and o t h e r f l a v o n o i d s
could be s e p a r a t e d as t r i m e t h y l s i l y l (TMS)
e t h e r s by GLC ( 1 1 2 ), b u t l i t t l e u s e h a s
been made of t h i s t e c h n i q u e c o n s i d e r i n g
i t s s e n s i t i v i t y ( t o t h e nanogram l e v e l ) ,
r a p i d i t y and t h e f a c t t h a t t h e compounds
can be r e a d i l y e s t i m a t e d q u a n t i t a t i v e l y
(113). I n almost r e p o r t e d c a s e s f l a v o n o i d
e t h e r s have been s e p a r a t e d on columns con-
t a i n i n g t h e s i l i c o n e t h e r polar phases
e . g . OV 1, OV 1 7 o r SE 30 ( 1 1 2 ) .
8.10.5. Electrophoresis
E l e c t r o p h o r e s i s on e i t h e r paper o r t h i n
l a y e r s i,s a r e p o r t e d t e h c n i q u e (:114) which
h a s been s c a r c e l y used i n t h e f l a v o n o i d
f i e l d . R u t i n , and q u e r c e t i n amongst o t h e r
f l a v o n o i d g l y c o s i d e s and a g l y c o n e s could
be r e a d i l y s e p a r a t e d u s i n g b o r a t e b u f f e r s
on TLC c e l l u l o s e l a y e r s ( 114 ) . However,
e l e c t r o p h i l i c examination of e x t r a c t s con-
t a i n i n g charged flavonoid-compounds of a l l
t y p e s , which may be more widely d i s t r i b u -
t e d t h a n h i t h e r t o b e l i e v e d , may pay hand-
some d i v i d e n d s ( 8 1 and 115).
RUTIN 675
References
1. The Merck Index, 9th Edn. Martha Windholz, Merck & Co.
Inc., Rahway, N . J . , U.S.A. (1976).
98. Y . Okay and S. Mat suo, J. Chem. SOC. Japan, Pure Chem.
S e c t . , 2,(6), 610, (1955); through Anal. Abstr. 2,
671, (1956).
1 . Description 684
1 . 1 Nomenclature 684
1.2 Formulae 684
1.3 Molecular Weight 685
1.4 Elemental Composition 685
1.5 Chemical Abstract Registry Number 685
1.6 Appearance, Color, and Odor 685
2. Physical Properties 685
2. I Melting Point 685
2.2 Solubility 685
2.3 Identification 686
2.4 Spectral Properties 687
3. Synthesis 696
4. Metabolism and Excretion 699
5. Methods of Analysis 699
5.1 Titrimetric Methods 699
5.2 Spectrophotometric Methods 700
5.3 Polarographic Method 702
5.4 Chromatographic Methods 702
References 710
ANALYTICAL PROFILESOF DRUG SUBSTANCES 683 Copyright by thc American Pharmaceutical Association
VOLUME 12 ISBN 0-12-269812-7
684 ABDULLAH A. AL-BADR
1. Description
1.1 Nomenclature
1.11 Chemical Names
- lO,ll-Dihydro-N,N,B-trirnethyl-5H-dibenz[b,f]
azepine-5-propanamine hydrogen maleate
- 5-[3-(Dirnethylamino)-2-methylpropyl]-l0,11-
dihydro-5H-dibenz[b,f]azepine hydrogen
maleate
- 5-(3-Dimethylamino-2-methylpropy)iminodiben-
zyl hydrogen maleate
- 3-(lO-ll-Dihydro-5H-dibenz[b,f]azepine-5-y1)
-2-methyl-propyl-N,N-dimethyl ammonium hydro
-gen maleate
- 5-(3-Dimethylamino-2-methylpropy)-lO,ll-di-
hydro-5H-dibenz[b,f]azepine hydrogen maleate
2OH26N2 (base)
(maleate salt)
C20H26N2y ‘qH4’4
TRIMIPRAMINE MALEATE 685
1.22 Structural
lo 11
CH COOH
t CH3
CH COOH
CH3
Trimipramine 294.42
Trimipramine Maleate 410.5
1.4 Elemental Composition
C 81.58% H 8.90% N 9.52% (base)
C 70.22% H 7.36% N 6.82% 0 15.60% (maleate)
[ 739-71-91 base
[521-78-81 maleate salt
2. Physical Properties
2.1 Meltine Point
2.2 Solubility
2.3 Identification
3430 N-CH3
0.98 d CH2-CH(CH
-3 ) -CH2-
/CH?
2.8 S -N
\
CH,
3.1-3.9 m Methylene protons.
(unresolved)
.7 i a
CH COOH
II
CH COOH
3 130.12 13 27.68
7 130.12 14 16.76
4 135.56 15 62.47
6 135.56 16 43.27
4a 147.45 17 123.19
6a 147.45 18 169.27
10 32.06
I TMS
I
PPM (6)
Figure 4 : Carbon-13 NMR Spectrum of Trimipramine maleate in CDC13
with TMS as internal reference.
694 ABDULLAH A. AL-BADR
294 25 l+* p 3
kH2CH-CH2
I -N\
CH3
CH3
249 100
CH-CH= CH2
I
CH3
234 35
CH-CH=CH2
208 50
193 70
m'
Fig. 5 . Mass Spectrum of Trimipramine maleate (EI).
696 ABDULLAH A. AL-BADR
Re1ative ion
intensity %
65
+ CH3
CH2-CH-CH=N
0 ,
t \
CH3 CH3
+ ,CH3
84 63 CH2=CH-CH=N
\
+ HCH3
72 32 CH-N
l \
CH3 CH3
CH =N
+ NCH3
58 82
2 \
CH3
@& /CH3
*C1CH2-CH-CH2 -N\
toluene* Trimipramine
NaNH2
A CH3
TRIMIPMMINE MALEATE 6?7
I CH -co2
COOCH~CH-CH~-N( :Trimipramine
I
CH3
CH3
c) Reaction of the 5- [ C H J S O ~CH2CH(CH3)CH2] derivative
of lO,ll-dihydro-5H-dibenz[b,f] azepine with dimethy-
lamine (6).
I x CH
CH2CH-CH2-S-OCH3+ H-N( 3, Trimipramine
I I1
CH3 0 CH3
~H~CH-CH~N,
,
COOC2H5
CH2CH-CH N
I CH3 1 'CH3
CH3
CH3
698 ABDULLAH A . AL-BADR
CH3+ 1-
0
0
OCH3
I Toluene, K2C03
-+
CH2CH-CH-N,CH3
I 0 CH3
1 2
CH3
m I
H
CH
ClCOCl
- -4
t0Cl
I
1 3 / CH3
HO-CH2-CH-CH2 -N
\
I CH3 c
~ @Q-+
I JH3
COOCH2CH-CH2N,
I
CH3
CH3
ICH2CH-CH2N,0 CH3
I c*3
CH3
Trimipramine
TRIMIPRAMINE MALEATE 699
5. Methods of Analysis
a) Aqueous Titration
b) Non-Aqueous Titration
c) Oscillometric Titration
Gifford --
et a1 (15) studied the luminesence
characteristics of trimipramine and several
classes of drugs affecting the central nervous
system. The compound was studied in ethanol at
at 77K. The characteristics for trimipramine
are :
Excitation maxima 300 nm, the phosphoresence
maxima 450-470 nm and the phosphoresence life
time 0.70 sec.
5.23 Colorimetric Methods
a) French -
et -
a1 (16) reported a colorimetric
analysis of some dibenzazepines including
trimipramine. The determination of these
drugs has been studied by:
1. Treatment in acid solution with HN02 and
measurement of the extinction of the
reaction mixture at 390 nm.
2. Addition of bromothymol blue to solution
buffered at pH 7 and extraction with
benzene, with measurement of the extinc-
tion of the benzene extract at 410 nm.
3. Direct measurement of the extinction of
the acid solution at 251 nm. The analysis
TIUMIPRAMINE MALEATE 701
Volke -
et -
a1 (20) used a 3-electrode polarograph,
with a rotating-dlsc indicator electrode (~1300rpm)
and s.c.e., f o r the attempted anodic oxidation, of
trimipramine and other related compounds. Acetoni-
trile media were used, with 0.1 M tetrabutylammonium
perchlorate as supporting electrolyte. At both pla-
tinum and gold indicator electrodes,
5.41 Gas-Chromatography
Clarke (2) reported the retention time of
trimipramine to be 0.64 relative to codeine
using 2.5% SE-30 on 80-100 mesh chromosob
W A WHMDS, 5 feet X 4 mm id glass column.
Clarke (2) also reported a retention times of
trimipramine to be 0.30 (0.15) relative to
codeine using 3% XE-60 silicon nitrile polymer
on 100-120 mesh chromosob W.
Viala -et -
a1 (21) described a gas chromatogra-
phic technique f o r the identification of trimi-
pramine using two types of columns, XE-60/
Igapal o r Aeropack and UNCON polar o r pre-
alkalanized varport-30. The latter has the base
o r the salt o f the compound in methanolic
solution.
Octadecylsilane Methanol : H20 1 ml/min-l Fluore- The retention volume from (34)
-coated spheri- (35 : 65) scence a point of injection for i
sorb. spectro- 25 cm column with 3.7 1.
meter. The Xf (fluorescence wave-
length) = 412 mm
TRIMIPRAMINE MALEATE I01
I
I
Stationary Developing Solvent Detecting Remarks Rf Ref.
Phase Agent value
~ ~~
Silica gel Dehydrated peroxide-free Spraying with Fluorescence can 0.170 (39)
(activated) ether: acet0ne:diethylamine dil. iodo- be performed after
(9O:lO:l) platinate 24 hours.
Benzene:acetone (100: 20) Teagent in Positive results 0.154
shaken with 10 ml of 5% N-HC1 follow- are obtained with
aq. NH solution. ed by 50% 100 mg of the pro-
3 H2SO4 and duct.
examlning
under U.V.
radiation.
~~~~ ~
Contd.. . .
Stationary Developing Solvent Detecting Remarks Rf Ref.
Agent valut
Silica gel G Hexane:anhydrous diethylamine 55% H3PO3 It is possible to - (41)
(93:7) saturated identify a psycho-
wl’th KC104 tropic drug in urine
and heat. in the event of toxi-
cological emergency.
Kieselgel -Ether:acetone:ethyl acetate: Iodine Used for rapid - (42)
GF254 diethylamine (85 :11 :2 :2) vapour identification.
-Benzene:acetone:diethylamine Bromlne Used for rapid
(50 : 10 : 5) vapour identification.
-Methanol:cyclohexane:Methyl Used for the -
acetate (17.8 :33.6:48.6] identification of
-Butanol:toluene:methanal: the tertiary amine.
H20 : acetic acid
(22:48:18:7:5)
Kieselge
- 1 Cyc1ohexane:ethanol:butanol: - 0.61
60F254 25% NH40H (80:20:10:0.4)
6. References
12. T. Pomazanska-Kolodziejska, --
Farm. Pol., -
30, 1005
(1974).
Can. J. -
14. E. Adonai Martin, -- Chem., -
45, 75 (1967).
15. L.A. Gifford, J.N. Miller, J.W. Bridges and D.T. Burns,
Talanta,24,
- 273 (1977).
TRIMIPRAMINE MALEATE 711
J . Pharm. B e l g . , -
17. M. S l u n j s k i and I . Turkovic, -- 25, 400
(1970).
23. S . F . R e i t e , -
Medd. - Farm.
Nor. - - Selsk., -
37, 148 (1975).
J,
2 7 . M . R . D e t a e v e r n i e r , L . Dryon and D . L . Massart, -
Chromatogr., - 128, 204 (1976).
- 55 (1979).
33. L.P. Hackett and L.J. Dusci, Clln. Toxicol.,l5,
J. Chromatogr., -
34. L.A. King, - 208, 113 (1981).
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
1. Description 714
1 . 1 Name, Formula, Molecular Weight, Elemental Composition 7 14
2. Physical Properties 714
2.3 Mass Spectrometry 714
2.8 Solubilization 717
2.9 Effect On Surface Tension Of Liquids 718
6. Methods of Analysis 718
6.1 Titrimetric Analysis 718
6 . 2 Colorimetric Analysis 718
6.4 Turbidimetric Analysis 718
6.7 Polarographic Analysis 719
6.8 Miscellaneous 719
References 719
ANALYTICAL PROFILES OF DRUG SUBSTANCES 713 Copyright by the American Pharmaceutlaal Asswiatmn
VOLUME 12 ISBN 0-12-260812-7
714 SATINDER AHUJA AND JEROLD COHEN
1. DESCRIPTION
C2Il5
I
COOCH2CH(CH2) 3CH3
I
CH2
I
CH-SO3Na
I
COOCH2CH(CH2) 3CH3
I
C2H5
2. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
157 113
- r
H @
‘
0
m/z 4 2 3
HO-! CH3
It0 0: 1~ 2 ~ 5
L-
229 12999
I
1- S02H
t l@
‘ZH5
O/\I/\/\CH3
m/z 358
3-0
HO 0 ‘ZH5
c.
211
H - -OH
‘ZH5
8 0 ‘ZH5
716 SATINDER AHUJA AND JEROLD COHEN
100 -
w -
m -
m -
0 0 -
w -
4 0 -
5 0 -
2.8 Solubilization
The critical micelle concentration value of 3.0
nmoles/l was determined by plotting desorption potential (d.c.
polarography without electrolyte) vs. log concentration (5).
The solution states of dioctyl sodium sulfosuccinate were ex-
amined by lH NMR (6). Two hydrocarbon chains of its molecules,
in the monomeric state, aggregate with each other in water.
Addition of aqueous sodium chloride solution to the Aerosol
OT-n-octane system showed a peak corresponding to micellar-
solubilized water and another peak corresponding to separated
water (7). Systems containing aluminum chloride differed from
those containing mono or divalent electrolytes. In 0.27M
AlC13, the two peaks merged into a single peak, indicating
breakdown of the micellar system. The magnitude of cation
effect was in the order Na<Ca<Al. The dynamic behavior of
Aerosol OT in the monomeric state in methanol and micellar
states in water, chloroform and benzene was studied by mea-
surements of 13C-NMR spin lattice relaxation time and the
effect of a lanthanide shift reagent (tris(6,6,7,7,8,8,8-
heptafluoro-2,2-dimethyl-3,5 octane dionate) ytterbium in
CHC13 (8,9). The results show that Aerosol OT molecules in
the micellar state associate with each other by the polar
head groups; their hydrocarbon chains are flexible and the
mobility of side chain is restricted to a greater extent than
that of the main chain.
6. METHODS OF ANALYSIS
6.8 Miscellaneous
A nitrogen blowing technique allowed quantitative
recovery of surfactants present in solution and can be applied
to analysis of surface waters and waste waters (21).
REFERENCES
'Deceased
ANALYTICAL PROFILES OF DRUG SUBSTANCES 721 Copyrighiby the American Phamdceutical Assmatirn
VOLUME 12 ISBN 0-12-260812-1
722 ALEX POST AND RALPH S. SANTORO
1. Physical Properties
The FD mass s p e c t r u m o f i s o p r o p a m i d e i o d i d e i s
shown i n F i g u r e 1 and t h e f r a g m e n t a t i o n i o n s a r e
t a b u l a t e d i n T a b l e 1. The s p e c t r u m was o b t a i n e d
o n a V a r i a n MAT CH-5 DF mass s p e c t r o m e t e r . The
emitter was l o a d e d by t h e d i p p i n g t e c h n i q u e from
a m e t h a n o l s o l u t i o n . An emitter c u r r e n t o f 2 3
m i l l i a m p e r e s was u s e d t o o b t a i n t h e spectrum.
The s p e c t r u m shows a n i n t e n s e p e a k f o r t h e c a t i o n
a t M/Z 353. Minor p e a k s a r e o b s e r v e d a t b o t h
lower and h i g h e r M/Z v a l u e s .
Peak I n t e n s i t y ~ a t a
40 00 0 01 328 00 0 42 383 00 0 36
43 00 0 04 329 00 0 15 384 00 0 44
58 00 8 52 330 00 0 56 385 00 0 12
59 00 0 40 331 00 6 42 386 00 0 42
60 00 0 02 332 00 8 78 387 00 0 43
78 00 0 02 333 00 0 75 388 00 0 49
115 00 0 11 335 00 0 02 389 00 0 43
127 00 0 04 336 00 0 02 390 00 0 84
128 00 0 02 337 00 0 02 391 00 0 59
155 00 0 01 338 00 1 68 392 00 0 21
159 00 0 02 339 00 0 73 393 00 2 27
161 00 0 01 340 00 0 07 394 00 0 82
185 00 0 02 341 00 0 03 395 00 3 90
228 00 0 01 343 00 0 02 396 00 3 27
235 00 0 01 344 00 0 03 397 00 5 21
236 00 0 06 345 00 0 06 398 00 4 03
237 00 0 81 346 00 0 10 399 00 1 12
238 00 0 45 347 00 0 03 400 00 0 22
239 00 0 04 350 00 0 04 401 00 0 17
265 00 0 04 351 00 0 82 402 00 0 14
267 00 0 02 352 00 1 16 403 00 0 15
277 00 0 02 353 00 100 00 404 00 0 02
291 00 0 01 354 00 66 03 406 00 0 02
293 00 0 04 355 00 10 05 407 00 0 06
294 00 0 09 356 00 0 84 409 00 0 14
295 00 0 04 357 00 0 03 410 00 0 16
296 00 0 04 358 00 0 01 411 00 0 05
297 00 0 02 359 00 0 17 412 00 0 03
298 00 0 04 360 00 1 56 413 00 0 07
303 00 0 05 361 00 1 03 414 00 0 09
304 00 0 02 362 00 0 63 415 00 0 07
308 00 0 24 363 00 0 23 416 00 0 05
309 00 0 31 364 00 0 14 417 00 0 17
310 00 11 04 365 00 4 88 418 00 0 08
311 00 3 74 366 00 2 30 419 00 0 04
312 00 0 79 367 00 12 44 421 00 0 09
313 00 0 20 368 00 7 41 422 00 0 02
314 00 0 30 369 00 7 20 424 00 0 02
315 00 0 45 370 00 2 14 425 00 0 02
316 00 0 55 371 00 0 50 429 00 0 11
317 00 0 47 372 00 0 76 430 00 0 04
318 00 0 19 373 00 1 30 431 00 0 02
319 00 0 15 374 00 0 89 434 00 0 02
320 00 0 20 375 00 1 42 436 00 0 07
321 00 0 83 376 00 1 44 437 00 0 11
322 00 0 83 377 00 1 22 438 00 0 05
323 00 0 33 378 00 0 35 474 00 0 01
324 00 1 15 379 00 1 54 476 00 0 01
325 00 8 20 380 00 0 75 478 00 0 02
326 00 0 13 381 00 1 61
327 00 0 91 3 8 1 00 1 07
a,
5
.rl
5
0
H
a,
5
3
P
0
k
P
::
H
ICI
0
5
k
726 ALEX POST AND RALPH S. SANTORO
8
CH2
1 173.9 singlet
2 142.3 singlet
3 128.7 doublet
4 128.2 doublet
5 127.1 doublet
6 62.9 doublet
7 59.2 singlet
8 54.4 triplet
9 42.7 quartet
15 32.1 triplet
16(a) 30.1 quartet
17 16.9 quartet
18 16.5 quartet
(a) P o s s i b l e Methyliodide
1.3 X-Ray D i f f r a c t i o n
The s t r u c t u r e of i s o p r o p a m i d e i o d i d e , d e t e r m i n e d
by s i n g l e c r y s t a l x - r a y d i f f r a c t i o n , was shown t o
be orthorhombic w i t h u n i t c e l l dimensions, a =
17.548(5), b -14.564(4), c = 8.993(3)A0.(3)
Datta, e t a ~ ( i s~ i n) a g r e e m e n t w i t h t h e a b o v e .
They a l s o r e p o r t e d t h a t t h e a n g l e between t h e two
p h e n y l g r o u p s i s 82O and t h e amide g r o u p is p l a n -
a r , making a n g l e s of 84 a n d 89O w i t h t h e two
p h e n y l g roups.
ISOPKOPAMIDE 727
1.4 P a r t i t i o n Coefficient
The t r u e p a r t i t i o n c o e f f i c i e n t f o r isopro-
pamide ion p a i r s w i t h benzoate, p-toluene-
sulfonate, and s a l i c y l a t e (molar r a t i o ;
1:l) between n-octanol and 0 . 1 pH 7.4
phosphate buffer have been reported by
Shim, e t a ~ ( and ~ a) r e l i s t e d i n Table 3.
Anion P a r t i t i o n coe f f i c i e n t ( a )
The apparent p a r t i t i o n c o e f f i c i e n t s i n
n-octanol and pH 7.4 aqueous phosphate
buffer (0.1%) were determined f o r iso-
propamide-bile s a l t ion p a i r s . The p a r t i -
t i o n c o e f f i c i e n t s varied w i t h t h e concen-
t r a t i o n of t h e b i l e s a l t and indicated t h a t
w i t h increasingly l a r g e r molar amounts of
bile s a l t , the partition coefficient i n -
creased.
Apparent Partition
Bile Salt Coefficient (a)
(a) At 22 2 l0C
2. Methods of Analysis
2.11 Identification
T a b l e 7. High P r e s s u r e L i q u i d Chromatoqraphy
of I s o p r o p a m i d e
R e t e n t i o n Time
Mobile Phase pH (Seconds)
Met a b o l i s m
References
1. G . R o b e r t s , p e r s o n a l communication.
2. D. S t a i g e r , p e r s o n a l communication.
3. Chawdhury, S.A. a n d Koch, M . H . J . , Acta
C r y s t a l l o g r . , S e c t . B , 1 2 8 6 (1976) .
4. D a t t a , N. , B r e e n , P., a n d P a u l i n g , P., J.C.S.,
P e r k i n 11, 7 8 1 ( 1 9 7 7 ) .
5. Shim, C.K., N i s h i g a k i , R. , I g a , T., a n d Hanano,
M . , I n t . J. Pharm., &, 1 4 3 ( 1 9 8 1 ) .
6. G a g i n e l l a , T.S., B a s s , P., P e r r i n , J . H . , and
,
V a l l n e r , J.J., J. Pharm. S c i . 62, 1 1 2 1 ( 1 9 7 3 ) .
7. C h a t t e n , L.G., Napper, A.C., a n d B a r r y , P.J. ,
ibid. , 56, 834 ( 1 9 6 7 ) .
732 ALEX POST AND RALPH S. SANTORO
733
734 CUMULATIVE INDEX